Asus DELUXE P5LD2 User Manual
Motherboard P5LD2 Delux e
ii ii ii ii ii E2099 E2099 E2099 E2099 E2099 Revised Edition V2 Revised Edition V2 Revised Edition V2 Revised Edition V2 Revised Edition V2 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair , modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECT ORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTW ARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe.
iii iii iii iii iii Contents Notices ................................................................................................ vi Safety information ............................................................................. vii About this guide ............................................................................... viii P5LD2 Deluxe specifications summary ................................................ x Chapter 1: Chapter 1: Chapter 1: Chapter 1: Chapter 1: Product introduction Product introduction Product introduction Product introduction Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Life features ............................................. 1-5 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-6 Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Hardware information Hardware information Hardware information Hardware information Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................ 2-2 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ................................................. 2-3 2.2.4 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-4 2.2.5 Layout contents ..................................................... 2-5 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-7 2.3.1 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-7 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ...................... 2-10 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan .................. 2-12 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-14 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-14 2.4.2 Memory configurations ......................................... 2-14 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-17 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ................................................. 2-17 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-18 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-18 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card .............................. 2-18 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments .......................................... 2-19 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slots ........................................... 2-20 2.5.5 PCI slots ................................................................ 2-21 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 ...................................................... 2-21 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-22 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-23 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-23 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-25
iv iv iv iv iv Contents Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Powering up Powering up Powering up Powering up Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .................... 3-2 Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: BIOS setup BIOS setup BIOS setup BIOS setup BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.4 ASUS EZ Flash utility .............................................. 4-7 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-8 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-11 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-12 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-12 4.2.3 Navigation keys .................................................... 4-12 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-13 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ................................................... 4-13 4.2.6 Configuration fields .............................................. 4-13 4.2.7 Pop-up window ..................................................... 4-13 4.2.8 Scroll bar .............................................................. 4-13 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-13 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-14 4.3.1 System Time ......................................................... 4-14 4.3.2 System Date ......................................................... 4-14 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ................................................ 4-14 4.3.4 Language .............................................................. 4-14 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ......... 4-15 4.3.6 IDE Configuration .................................................. 4-16 4.3.7 System Information .............................................. 4-18 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-19 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration .................................... 4-19 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ................................................. 4-23 4.4.3 USB Configuration ................................................. 4-24 4.4.4 CPU Configuration ................................................. 4-25 4.4.5 Chipset ................................................................. 4-27 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration ............................ 4-29 4.4.7 PCI PnP ................................................................. 4-31
v v v v v Contents 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-33 4.5.1 Suspend Mode ...................................................... 4-33 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ................................ 4-33 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .................................................. 4-33 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ................................................ 4-33 4.5.5 APM Configuration ................................................ 4-34 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ................................................. 4-36 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-38 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-38 4.6.2 Hard Disk Drives ................................................... 4-38 4.6.3 Boot Settings Configuration ................................. 4-39 4.6.4 Security ................................................................ 4-40 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-43 Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Software support Software support Software support Software support Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ......................................... 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu .......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .......................................................... 5-4 5.2.4 Manuals menu ......................................................... 5-5 5.2.5 ASUS Contact information ...................................... 5-6 5.2.6 Other information ................................................... 5-6 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-9 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠.................................................... 5-9 5.3.2 AI NET 2 ............................................................... 5-11 5.3.3 Audio configurations ............................................ 5-12 5.5 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-17 5.5.1 Installing hard disks .............................................. 5-18 5.5.2 Intel î RAID configurations .................................... 5-19 5.5.3 Silicon Image RAID configurations ........................ 5-29 5.6 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-39 Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: CPU features CPU features CPU features CPU features CPU features A.1 Intel î EM64T ........................................................................ A-1 Using the Intel î EM64T feature ............................................ A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.2.1 System requirements ............................................. A-1 A.2.2 Using the EIST ........................................................ A-2 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 Using the Hyper-Threading Technology ............................... A-3
vi vi vi vi vi Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâÂÂs authority to operate this equipment.
vii vii vii vii vii Safety information Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer.
viii viii viii viii viii About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and configuring the motherboard. How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized This guide contains the following parts: ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features that the motherboard supports. Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty flyers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
ix ix ix ix ix Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography Typography Typography Typography Typography Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key. <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[filename] afudos /iP5LD2E.ROM DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
x x x x x P5LD2 Deluxe specifications summary (continued on the next page) CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage AI Audio AI Audio AI Audio AI Audio AI Audio IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 LGA775 socket for Intel î Pentium î D/Intel î Pentium î 4 or Intel î Celeron î processors Compatible with Intel î PCG 05B/05A and 04B/04A processors Supports Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 Technology (EM64T) Supports Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) Supports Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology Northbridge: Intel î 945P Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel î ICH7R 1066/800/533 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support unbufferred non-ECC DDR2-667 (FSB 1066/800), DDR2-533 (FSB 1066/800/533), or DDR2-400 (FSB 800/533) memory modules Supports up to 4 GB system memory 1 x PCI Express x16 slot for discrete graphics card 1 x Universal PCI Express⢠x16 slot (at x4 mode) 1 x PCI Express x1 slots 3 x PCI slots Intel î ICH7R SouthBridge supports: - 1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 hard disk - 4 x Serial ATA 3Gb/s with Intelî Matrix Storage Technology including RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 configuration Silicon Image 3132 SATA controller supports: - 1 x Internal Serial ATA 3Gb/s hard disk drive - 1 x External Serial ATA 3Gb/s SATA On-The-Go - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10*, RAID 5* and CONCATENATION* ( * Setup with a Serial ATA port multiplier ) ITE 8211F IDE controller supports: - 2 x UltraDMA 133/100/66 hard disks Realtek î ALC882M High-Definition Audio 8-CH CODEC 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF out port 1 x Optical S/PDIF out port Supports Universal Audio Jack (UAJ î ) Technology Supports Audio Sensing and Enumeration Technology Features the Dolby î Master Studio TI 1394a controller supports: - 1 x Internal IEEE 1394a connector - 1 x IEEE 1394a connector at the rear panel
xi xi xi xi xi Supports up to 10 USB 2.0 ports Marvell î 88E8053 PCI Express⢠Gigabit LAN controller Supports AI NET 2 CPU Lock Free ASUS AI Overclocking (Intelligent Frequency Tuner) ASUS NOS (Non-delay Overclocking System) ASUS PEG Link for single/dual graphics cards ASUS HyperPath 3 Precision Tweaker supports: - DIMM voltage: 8-step DRAM voltage control - Core voltage: Adjustable CPU voltage at 0.0125 V - PCI Express Frequency: Allows 1MHz increment from 100MHz to 200MHz - Stepless Frequency Selection(SFS) allows 1MHz increment from 100MHz to 400 MHz ASUS C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) Adjustable FSB/DDR2 frequencies with fixed PCI/PCI-E frequencies WiFi-TV PCI card (optional) supports: - Digital TV (DVB-T only), Analog TV, FM - WiFi@Home 802.11 a/b/g Stack Cool 2 SATA On-The-Go AI Quiet ASUS SATA On-The-Go ASUS EZ Plug ASUS AI Q-Fan ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS MyLogo2 ASUS EZ Flash 1 x Parallel port 1 x IEEE 1394a port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 4 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x External SATA port (SATA On-The-Go) 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x PS/2 mouse port (green) 8-channel audio ports P5LD2 Deluxe specifications summary (continued on the next page) USB USB USB USB USB LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking features features features features features ASUS AI Life ASUS AI Life ASUS AI Life ASUS AI Life ASUS AI Life Special features Special features Special features Special features Special features Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel
xii xii xii xii xii P5LD2 Deluxe specifications summary BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal connectors connectors connectors connectors connectors Power Power Power Power Power Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD contents contents contents contents contents 8 MB Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP, DMI2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, WfM2.0 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x Primary IDE connector 2 x IDE connectors 5 x Serial ATA RAID connectors 1 x CPU fan connector 1 x Power fan connector 2 x Chassis fan connectors 1 x Serial port connector (COM port) 1 x 24-pin ATX power connector 1 x 8-pin ATX 12 V power connector 1 x 4-pin ASUS EZ Plug⢠connector 2 x USB connectors for 4 additional USB 2.0 ports 1 x Optical drive audio connector 1 x IEEE 1394a connector 1 x GAME/MIDI connector 1 x Chassis intrusion connector 1 x Front panel High-Definition audio connector System panel connector ATX power supply (with 24-pin and 8-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12 V 2.0 compliant ASUS EZ Plug* ( *When using two graphics cards and a 20-pin ATX PSU ) ATX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in (30.5 cm x 24.4 cm) Device drivers ASUS PC Probe II ASUS Update ASUS AI Booster Microsoft î DirectX 9.0c Anti-Virus Utility (OEM version) WinDVD Suite (OEM version) Adobe Acrobat Reader ASUS Screensaver *Specifications are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS î î î î î P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules IEEE1394 1-port module Serial (COM2) port module USB 2.0 (2 ports) and GAME (1 port) module Cables Cables Cables Cables Cables 5 x Serial ATA signal cables 2 x Serial ATA power cables (dual plugs) 1 x Serial ATA power cable (single plug) 2 x Ultra DMA/133 cables 40-conductor IDE cable Floppy disk drive cable Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories I/O shield Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs ASUS motherboard support CD InterVideo î WinDVD Suite î ( OEM version) Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation User guide If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology The motherboard comes with a 775-pin surface mount Land Grid Array (LGA) socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î D, Intel î Pentium î 4 or Intel î Celeron î processor in the 775-land package. The motherboard supports the Intel î Pentium î 4 or Intel î Pentium î D processor with 1066/800/533 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). The motherboard also supports the Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology and is fully compatible with Intel î 04B/04A and 05B/05A processors. See page 2-7 for details. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î 945P chipset 945P chipset 945P chipset 945P chipset 945P chipset The Intel î 945P chipset is the latest and one of the most powerful chipsets in personal computing. It supports 1066MHz Front Side Bus (FSB), PCI Express technology, dual-channel DDR2 memory, and IntelâÂÂs 800 MHz series Dual-Core⢠technology processors for lightning speed multi-tasking. Combined with the Intel î ICH7R that supports four Serial ATA II ports with Intel î Matrix Technology including RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 making it an excellent foundation for a powerful desktop computer. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î EM64T EM64T EM64T EM64T EM64T The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î D or Intel î Pentium î 4 processors with the Intel î EM64T (Extended Memory 64 Technology). The Intel î EM64T feature allows your computer to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efficient computing. See the Appendix for details. Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) Technology (EIST) Technology (EIST) Technology (EIST) Technology (EIST) The Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) intelligently manages the CPU resources by automatically adjusting the CPU voltage and core frequency depending on the CPU loading and system speed or power requirement. See page 4-26 and the Appendix for details. DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support The motherboard supports DDR2 memory which features data transfer rates o f 667 MHz (FSB 1066/800), 533 MHz (FSB 1066/800/533) or 400 MHz (FSB 800/533) to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. The dual-channel DDR2 architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 8.5 GB/s. See pages 2-14 to 2-17 for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface The motherboard fully supports PCI Express, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI specifications. See page 2-2 0 for details. Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) The Universal PCI Express slot allows users to set up a dual graphics card platform on a single motherboard. The ASUS Smart Switch detects PCI Express devices installed, and intelligently reroutes the PCI Express lanes to optimize bandwidth allocation. See page 2-20 for details. Dual RAID solution Dual RAID solution Dual RAID solution Dual RAID solution Dual RAID solution Onboard RAID controllers provide the motherboard with dual-RAID functionality that allows you to select the best RAID solution using IDE or Serial ATA devices. The Intel î ICH7R allows RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 configuration for four SATA connectors and supports the Intel î Matrix Storage Technology. See pages 2-27 and 5-19 for details. The Silicon Image î 3132 Serial ATA controller supports two additional Serial ATA connectors for RAID 0, RAID 1 and JBOD functionality. You can also configure a RAID 10, RAID 5 and CONCATENATION sets using a Serial ATA port multiplier. See pages 2-23, 2-24, 2-28 and 5-29 for details.
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Theatre-level audio Theatre-level audio Theatre-level audio Theatre-level audio Theatre-level audio (designed for Dolby (designed for Dolby (designed for Dolby (designed for Dolby (designed for Dolby î î î î î Master Studio) Master Studio) Master Studio) Master Studio) Master Studio) This motherboard offers theatre-level 7.1 surround sound and audio specifications higher than that of DVD. Enjoy true home theatre experience with the following advanced sound technologies: Dolby Prologic IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker, and Dolby Digital Live. See pages 2-23 and 5-12 for details. S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready The motherboard supports the S/PDIF technology through the S/PDIF interfaces on the rear panel and at midboard. The S/PDIF technology turns your computer into a high-end entertainment system with digital connectivity to powerful audio and speaker systems. See page 2-24 for details. IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support The IEEE 1394a interface provides high-speed and flexible PC connectivity to a wide range of peripherals and devices compliant to the IEEE 1394a standard. The IEEE 1394a interface allows up to 400 Mbps transfer rates through simple, low-cost, high-bandwidth asynchronous (real-time) data interfacing between computers, peripherals, and consumer electronic devices such as camcorders, VCRs, printers, TVs, and digital cameras. See pages 2-23 for details. USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 specification, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See page 2-24 for details. Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the ASIC (integrated in the Winbond Super I/O) to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The ASIC monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components. See page 4-36 for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Life features ASUS AI Life features ASUS AI Life features ASUS AI Life features ASUS AI Life features AI Quiet AI Quiet AI Quiet AI Quiet AI Quiet The ASUS AI Quiet function dynamically controls CPU speed and reduces temperature and fan speeds, thus minimizing noise and ensuring quiet operation. ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 Stack Cool 2 is a fan-less and zero-noise cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components by 20 ð C. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat that critical components generate. See page 2-3 for details. WiFi-TV Card (optional) WiFi-TV Card (optional) WiFi-TV Card (optional) WiFi-TV Card (optional) WiFi-TV Card (optional) ASUS WiFi-TV card complies with the IEEE 802.11 a/b/g wireless LAN adapter that allows data transmission of up to 54 Mbps using the 2.4 GHz frequency band. ASUS provides full software application support and a user-friendly wizard to help you set up your wireless local area network effortlessly. You can share photos, videos, and MP3 files with other wireless devices without tangling cables and wires. The ASUS WiFi-TV card also offers digital TV (for DVB-T only) connection, which presents higher TV resolution and more functions compared to the traditional analog TV standard. This multi-functional card also supports FM radio. Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go The motherboard supports the Serial ATA 3 Gb/s technology through the Serial ATA interfaces and the Intel î 945P MCH chipset. The Serial ATA 3 Gb/s specification provides twice the bandwidth of the current Serial ATA products with a host of new features, including Native Command Queuing (NCQ), Power Management (PM) Implementation Algorithm, and Hot Swap. Serial ATA allows thinner, more flexible cables with lower pin count and reduced voltage requirements. Leveraging these Serial ATA II features is the Serial ATA on the Go. This external port on the rear panel I/O provides smart setup, hot-plug and support for up to 16 devices with port-multiplier functions. See pages 2-23 and 2-28 for details.
1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(NOS) is a technology that auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed only when needed. See page 4-19 for details. PEG Link Mode PEG Link Mode PEG Link Mode PEG Link Mode PEG Link Mode This feature enhances your PCI Express graphics card performance. It allows the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system configuration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PEG Link Mode. AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET2 is a BIOS-based diagnostic tool that detects and reports Ethernet cable faults and shorts. With this utility, you can easily monitor the condition of the Ethernet cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. During the bootup process, AI NET2 immediately diagnoses the LAN cable and reports shorts and faults up to 100 meters at 1 meter accuracy. See pages 4-23 and 5-11 for details. CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 This feature allows you to restore the original BIOS data from the support CD in case when the BIOS codes and data are corrupted. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. See page 4-5 for details. AI Q-Fan AI Q-Fan AI Q-Fan AI Q-Fan AI Q-Fan The ASUS AI Q-Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efficient operation. See pages 4- 36 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow easier and faster configuration. See page 4-14 for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠This new feature present in the motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See page 5-9 for details. ASUS HyperPath 3 technology ASUS HyperPath 3 technology ASUS HyperPath 3 technology ASUS HyperPath 3 technology ASUS HyperPath 3 technology The ASUS Hyper Path 3 technology optimizes the full potential of the Intel î chipset by shortening the latency time between the CPU and the system memory. Enabling Hyper Path 3 on system improves memory performance without affecting system stability. See page 4-27 for details. Fanless Design Fanless Design Fanless Design Fanless Design Fanless Design The ASUS fanless design allows multi-directional heat flow from major thermal sources in the motherboard to lower overall system temperature.
1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-7 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-14 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-18 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-22 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-23
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft- off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or to a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity. ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standby Power OFF Powere d Off
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information P5LD2 DELUXE î 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the configuration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard fits into it. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 The motherboard comes with the ASUS Stack Cool 2 cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components by 20úC. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat that critical components generate.
2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout P ANEL P5LD2 DELUXE R AAFP GAME CHASSIS 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) CPU_F AN DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) CHA1_F AN2 IE_1394_2 FLOPPY Super I/O 8Mb BIOS TSB43AB22A PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Ke yboard P ARALLEL PORT SPDIF_O SPDIF_O2 CD EZ_PLUG ALC882M PCIEX16_1 PCIEX1_1 PCIEX16_2 PCI1 CLRTC USB78 USB56 S ATA 2 S ATA 1 S ATA 3 S ATA 4 SA T A_RAID2 PWR_F AN EX_SA T A1 Intel ICH7R SB_PWR EA TXPWR PRI_IDE CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CHA_F AN1 LGA775 Intel MCH 945P Marvell 88E8053 SA T A Link PCI2 PCI3 AUDIO PRI_EIDE SEC_EIDE ITE IT821 1F COM1 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: LAN port EA TX12V
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots Page Page Page Page Page 1. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-14 2. PCI Express x16 slot 2-19 3. PCI Express U-slot (at PCI Express x4 bandwidth) 2-19 4. PCI slots 2-20 5. PCI Express x1 slot 2-20 Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Page Page Page Page Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC) 2-22 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-23 2. Parallel port 2-23 3. IEEE 1394a port 2-23 4. LAN (RJ-45) port 2-23 5. Side Speaker Out port (black) 2-23 6. Center/Subwoofer port (orange) 2-23 7. Line In port (light blue) 2-23 8. Line Out port (lime) 2-23 9. Microphone port (pink) 2-24 10. Rear Speaker Out port (gray) 2-24 11. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 2-24 12. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-24 13. External SATA port 2-24 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port 2-24 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2-24 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-24
2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-25 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) 2-25 3. ITE IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], SEC_EIDE [red]) 2-26 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) 2-27 5. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID2) 2-28 6. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-29 7. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-29 8. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) 2-30 9. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) 2-30 10. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) 2-31 11. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1,PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) 2-31 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) 2-32 13. IEEE 1394a port connectors (10-1 pin IE1394 _2 ) 2-32 14. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, 8-pin EATX12V, 4-pin EZ_PLUG) 2-33 15. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) 2-34 System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) System warnsing speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) ATX power button/soft-off button (Light Green 2-pin PWRSW) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET)
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU To install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î D, Intel î Pentium î 4, and Intel î Celeron î processors in the 775-land package. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. ⢠Your boxed Intel î LGA775 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU, fan and heatsink assembly. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket pins are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket pins/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/ transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket pins resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/ loss/incorrect removal of the PnP cap. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE CPU Socket 775
2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and forefinger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should fit into the CPU notch. Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Load plate Load plate Load plate Load plate Load plate A B 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Load lever Load lever Load lever Load lever Load lever This side of the This side of the This side of the This side of the This side of the socket box should socket box should socket box should socket box should socket box should face you. face you. face you. face you. face you. PnP cap PnP cap PnP cap PnP cap PnP cap A B To prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 The CPU fits in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 Technology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading Technology. Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features.
2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Fastener Fastener Fastener Fastener Fastener Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The Intel î processor in the 775-land package requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. To install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. Narrow end Narrow end Narrow end Narrow end Narrow end of the groove of the groove of the groove of the groove of the groove ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î processor, the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. If you buy a CPU separately, make sure that you use only Intel î -certified multi-directional heatsink and fan. ⢠Your Intel î processor heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly, make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly. Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B B A A A A B B Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE CPU fan connector CPU_F AN GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM
2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan To uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Narrow end of the groove Narrow end of the groove Narrow end of the groove Narrow end of the groove Narrow end of the groove Refer to the documentation in the boxed or stand-alone CPU fan package for detailed information on CPU fan installation.
2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The figure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations You may install 256 MB, 512 MB and 1 GB unbuffered non-ECC DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠For dual-channel configuration, the total size of memory module(s) installed per channel must be the same (DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 = DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2). ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. Refer to the DDR2 Qualified Vendors List on the next page for details. ⢠Due to chipset resource allocation, the system may detect less than 4 GB system memory when you installed four 1 GB DDR2 memory modules. ⢠This motherboard does not support memory modules made up of 128 Mb chips or double sided x16 memory modules. Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Channel A Channel A Channel A Channel A Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE 240-pin DDR DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) DDR2-667 DDR2-667 DDR2-667 DDR2-667 DDR2-667 Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) : SS SS SS SS S S - Single-sided DS DS DS DS D S - Double-sided DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support : A A A A A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory configuration. B B B B B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the yellow slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration. C C C C C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into the yellow and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-667 MHz (FSB 1066/800) QVL. 256MB SAMSUNG M378T3253FZ0-CE6 SAMSUNG SS K4T56083QF-ZCE6 ⢠⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M378T6453FZ0-CE6 SAMSUNG DS K4T56083QF-ZCE6 ⢠⢠⢠256MB Kingston HYB18T512800AF3S Kingston SS KVR667D2N5/512 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Kingston E5108AE-GE-E Kingston DS KVR667D2N5/1G ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U64AP8-Y5 Hynix SS HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U64AP8-Y5 Hynix DS HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U64AP8-Y4 Hynix DS HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U64AP8-Y4 Hynix SS HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B4 MICRON DS 4VB41D9CZM ⢠⢠⢠1024MB MICRON MT16HTF12864AY-667A2 MICRON DS 4UAIID9CWX ⢠⢠256MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AY-667B5 MICRON SS 4SB42D9CZM ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B3 MICRON DS 4TB41D9CZM ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B3 MICRON DS 4UB41D9CZM ⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B3 MICRON DS 4SB41D9CZM ⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B3 MICRON DS 4SB42D9CZM ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64T64000HU-3S-A Infineon SS HYB18T512800AF3S ⢠⢠⢠256MB ELPIDA EBE25UC8ABFA-6E-E ELPIDA SS E2508AB-GE-E ⢠⢠⢠512MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8AEFA-6E-E ELPIDA SS E5108AE-GE-E ⢠⢠⢠1024MB ELPIDA EBE11UD8AEFA-6E-E N/A DS N/A ⢠⢠⢠Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Brand Brand Brand Brand Brand Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support
2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 512MB SAMSUNG M378T6553BG0-CD5 N/A SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB SAMSUNG M378T2953BG0-CD5 N/A DS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG M378T3253FG0-CD5 N/A SS K4T56083QF-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M378T6453FG0-CD5 N/A DS K4T56083QF-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB SAMSUNG M391T2953BG0-CD5 N/A DS K4T51083QB-GCD5(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M391T6453FG0-CD5 N/A DS K4T56083QF-GCD5(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS72T64000HU-3.7-A Infineon SS HYB18T512800AF3(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A Infineon SS HYB18T512800AC37 ⢠⢠⢠256MB Infineon HYS64T32000HU-3.7-A Infineon SS HYB18T512160AF-3.7 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Infineon HYS64T128020HU-3.7-A Infineon DS HYB18T512800AF37 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64T64000HU-3.7-A Infineon SS HYB18T512800AF37 ⢠⢠⢠512MB CORSAIR CM2X512-4200 N/A DS N/A ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AG-53EB2 MICRON DS 4FBIID9BQM ⢠⢠⢠1024MB MICRON MT16HTF12864AY-53EA1 MICRON DS 4JAIID9CRZ ⢠⢠⢠256MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AY-53EB3 MICRON SS 4FBIID9CHM ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-53EB2 MICRON DS 4FBIID9CHM ⢠⢠⢠256MB MICRON N/A MICRON SS 4DBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠1024MB MICRON MT18HTF12872AY-53EA1 MICRON DS 4MAIID9CRZ(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠1024MB MICRON MT16HTF12864AY-53EA1 MICRON DS 4MAIID9CRZ ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/1G N/A DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠256MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/256 N/A SS HYB18T512160AC-3.7 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/512 ELPIDA SS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U648-C4 N/A SS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U728-C4 N/A SS HY5PS12821F-C4(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U728-C4 N/A DS HY5PS12821F-C4(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U648-C4 N/A DS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U728-C4 N/A SS HY5PS12821FP-C4(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U648-C4 N/A DS HY5PS12821FP-C4 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U728-C4 N/A DS HY5PS12821F-E3(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB ELPIDA EBE51ED8ABFA-5C-E ELPIDA DS E5108AB-5C-E (ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8ABFA-5C ELPIDA DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8ABFA-5C-E ELPIDA DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠1024MB ELPIDA EBE11UD8ABFA-5C-E ELPIDA DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Brand Brand Brand Brand Brand Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DDR2-533 DDR2-533 DDR2-533 DDR2-533 DDR2-533 Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) : SS SS SS SS S S - Single-sided DS DS DS DS D S - Double-sided DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support : A A A A A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory configuration. B B B B B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the yellow slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration. C C C C C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into the yellow and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-533 MHz (FSB 1066/800/ 533) QVL.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. To install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 1 Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3
2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press firmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, configure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conflicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function 0 1 System Timer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 11 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C D D D D D E E E E E F F F F F G G G G G H H H H H PCI slot 1 â â â â â shared â â PCI slot 2 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 3 â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI Express x16 slot shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI Express x4 slot shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI Express x1 slot â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 1 â â â â shared â â â Onboard USB controller 2 â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 3 â â shared â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 4 â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB 2.0 controller â â â â shared â â â Onboard IDE port â â â â â â shared â Onboard SATA port â â â â â â â shared Onboard HD audio â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard LAN1 shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard PCIe SATA RAID â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂ
2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slots PCI Express x16 slots PCI Express x16 slots PCI Express x16 slots PCI Express x16 slots This motherboard has two PCI Express x16 slots that support PCI Express x16 graphic cards complying with the PCI Express specifications. With two graphics cards installed, the motherboard can enable quad-display. Primary PCI Express x 16 Primary PCI Express x 16 Primary PCI Express x 16 Primary PCI Express x 16 Primary PCI Express x 16 slot for discrete graphics slot for discrete graphics slot for discrete graphics slot for discrete graphics slot for discrete graphics card (blue) card (blue) card (blue) card (blue) card (blue) Universal PCI Universal PCI Universal PCI Universal PCI Universal PCI Express slot Express slot Express slot Express slot Express slot [x4 mode] (black) [x4 mode] (black) [x4 mode] (black) [x4 mode] (black) [x4 mode] (black) We recommend that you install a VGA card on the primary (blue) PCI Express slot, and install any other PCI Express device on the Universal PCI Express slot (black). Primary PCI Express x16 Primary PCI Express x16 Primary PCI Express x16 Primary PCI Express x16 Primary PCI Express x16 slot slot slot slot slot The primary PCI Express x16 graphics card supports PCI Express x16 graphic cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. Universal PCI Express slot Universal PCI Express slot Universal PCI Express slot Universal PCI Express slot Universal PCI Express slot (x4 mode) (x4 mode) (x4 mode) (x4 mode) (x4 mode) This motherboard also supports a Universal PCI Express slot with a maximum speed of 2 GB/s. The operating frequency of this slot changes, depending on the type of PCI Express card you install. Refer to the table on the next page for details. The figure shows two graphics cards installed on the primary PCI Express x16 slot and the Universal PCI Express slot. If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labeled CHA_FAN1 for better thermal environment. See page 2-31 for the connector location.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 Options for Universal Options for Universal Options for Universal Options for Universal Options for Universal PCI Express operating speed PCI Express operating speed PCI Express operating speed PCI Express operating speed PCI Express operating speed PCI Express slot PCI Express slot PCI Express slot PCI Express slot PCI Express slot Auto Automatically optimizes performance and functionality according to devices installed x4 mode [Faster] User gets the best performance but this mode disables the PCI Express x1 slot x2 mode [Fast] Always runs at PCI Express x2 speed 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI specifications. The figure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. ⢠Some PCI Express graphics cards cannot operate on x4/x2 mode. We suggest that you install these cards on the primary PCI Express slot (blue) to increase system stability. ⢠Some PCI Express devices cannot operate on x4/x2 mode. We suggest that you install these devices on the PCI Express slot x1 slot. 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 PCI Express x1 PCI Express x1 PCI Express x1 PCI Express x1 This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The figure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot.
2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.6 Jumpers 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! You do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear CMOS (Default) 12 23
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio configuration. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Center/Subwoofer port (orange). Center/Subwoofer port (orange). Center/Subwoofer port (orange). Center/Subwoofer port (orange). Center/Subwoofer port (orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). This port connects a tape, CD, DVD player, or other audio sources. 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker. In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel configuration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. Refer to the audio configuration table on the next page for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration. ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED LED LED LED LED LED ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK LED LED LED LED LED 11 4 6 13 1 16 2 15 14 5 7 8 9 10 3 12
2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. External SATA port. External SATA port. External SATA port. External SATA port. External SATA port. This port connects to an external SATA box or a Serial ATA port multiplier that supports up to 16 devices and enables smart setup and hot-plug function. 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port . This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. 15. 15. 15. 15. 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 16. 16. 16. 16. 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the rear speakers on a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio configuration. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Black Black Black Black Black â â â Side Speaker Out Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Port Port Port Port Port 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) Refer to the audio configuration table below for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided floppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the floppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Floppy disk drive connector NOTE: Orient the red markings o n the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red marking s (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE
2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], SEC_EIDE [red]) SEC_EIDE [red]) SEC_EIDE [red]) SEC_EIDE [red]) SEC_EIDE [red]) These connectors are for Ultra ATA 133/100/66 signal cables. The ITE IDE connectors support up to four IDE hard disk drives for easier data storage. P5LD2 DELUXE R P5LD2 DELUXE IDE connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_EIDE SEC_EIDE PIN 1 PIN 1 The connectors do not support ATAPI devices.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 configuration with the Intel î Matrix Storage Technology through the onboard Intel î ICH7R RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial ATA RAID configurations. These connectors are set to Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE mode by default. In S S S S S tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE mode, you can connect Serial ATA boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial ATA RAID set using these connectors, set the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.6 IDE Configurationâ on page 4-16 for details. Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA ⢠You must install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later versions before using Serial ATA hard disk drives. The Serial ATA RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1) is available only if you are using Windows î 2000/XP. ⢠When using the connectors in S S S S S tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SATA1 or SATA2 connector. Refer to the table on the next page for the recommended SATA hard disk drive connections. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE SA T A connectors S ATA 1 S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXP4 RSA T A_RXN4 GND GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXP3 RSA T A_RXN3 GND GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND S ATA 3 S ATA 4 Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Color Color Color Color Color Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Use Use Use Use Use SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 Red Red Red Red Red Master Master Master Master Master Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 Black Black Black Black Black Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Data disk Data disk Data disk Data disk Data disk
2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) This connector is for a Serial ATA signal cable. It supports a Serial ATA hard disk drive that you can combine with an external Serial ATA 3Gb/ s device to configure a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set, through the onboard Silicon Image SATA RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial ATA RAID configurations. The Silicon 3132 Controller item in the BIOS is set to [SATA2 Mode] by default, allowing you to enable the hot-plug function for the external device. Set to [RAID Mode] to use the connectors to build a RAID set. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE SA T A RAID connector SA T A_RAID 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Serial ATA hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Serial ATA signal cable and installed Serial ATA hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the Silicon Image RAID utility and SATA BIOS setup during POST. ⢠For details on the Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID configuration, refer to the âÂÂSil3132 UserâÂÂs Manualâ in your motherboard support CD. ⢠Use a Serial ATA port multiplier if you want to configure a RAID 5, RAID 10 or CONCATENATION set. ⢠Use an external SATA box to configure a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠The Serial ATA port multiplier and external SATA box are purchased separately. ⢠Make sure to install the Silicon Image SATA Link Sil 3132 driver and the Silicon Image RAID 5 Array Management Utility from the support CD before using RAID 5 configuration. Do not unplug the external Serial ATA drive when a RAID 0 or RAID 1 was configured.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy ACâÂÂ97 audio standard. It is recommended that you connect a high-definition front panel audio module to this connector to avail of the motherboardâÂÂs high-definition audio capability. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) This connector is for the 4-pin audio cable that connects to the audio connector at the back of the optical drive. Enable the CD-IN function in the audio utility when using this connector. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Internal audio connecto r CD (black) Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Analog front panel connector AC âÂÂ97 audio pin definitio n AAFP NC MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MICPWR NC AGND SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND
2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable t o the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) This connector is for a GAME/MIDI port. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The GAME/MIDI port connects a joystick or game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Game connector GAME 5V 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350 mA ~ 2000 mA (24 W max.) or a total of 1 A ~ 3.48 A (4 1.7 6 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. ⢠Only the CPU_FAN and CHA_FAN1 connectors support the ASUS Q-Fan 2 feature. ⢠If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labeled CHA_FAN1 for better heat dissipation. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufficient air flow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE COM port connector PIN 1 COM1 P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotatio n 12V GND Rotatio n 12V CPU_F AN CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotatio n 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM
2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector. The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default ) Never connect a USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable t o the IEEE 1394 connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 15. 15. 15. 15. 15. IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) This connector is for an additional IEEE 1394 port. Connect the IEEE 1394 module cable (orange) to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE IEEE 1394 connector IE1394_2 1 GND 12V TPB1- GND TP A1- 12V TPB1 GND TP A1
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-33 2-33 2-33 2-33 2-33 16. 16. 16. 16. 16. ATX power connectors ATX power connectors ATX power connectors ATX power connectors ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, (24-pin EATXPWR, (24-pin EATXPWR, (24-pin EATXPWR, (24-pin EATXPWR, 8 8 8 8 8 -pin -pin -pin -pin -pin E E E E E ATX12V ATX12V ATX12V ATX12V ATX12V , 4-pin EZ_PLUG , 4-pin EZ_PLUG , 4-pin EZ_PLUG , 4-pin EZ_PLUG , 4-pin EZ_PLUG ) ) ) ) ) These connectors are for ATX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE A TX power connectors EA TXPWR EA TX12V EZ_PLUG 5V EZ_DET GND 12V 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olt s Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC ⢠You may use a 4-pin ATX12V power plug for this connector. ⢠Make sure to remove the cap on the connector before connecting an 8-pin EPS 12V power plug. ⢠Use only either a 4-pin ATX12V or an 8-pin EPS 12V power plug. Connecting other power plug types may serious damage to the system. Important notes on motherboard power requirements Important notes on motherboard power requirements Important notes on motherboard power requirements Important notes on motherboard power requirements Important notes on motherboard power requirements ⢠When installing two VGA cards using a 20-pin ATX PSU with 12V capability, we recommend that you connect the EZ Plug for sufficient power. Refer to the PSU documentation for dual VGA power requirements. ⢠For a fully configured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with ATX 12 V Specification 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 350 W. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 8-pin/4-pin ATX12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when configuring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. EA TX12V Connect a Connect a Connect a Connect a Connect a 4-pin power 4-pin power 4-pin power 4-pin power 4-pin power plug here plug here plug here plug here plug here Remove the cap Remove the cap Remove the cap Remove the cap Remove the cap before using an before using an before using an before using an before using an 8-pin power plug 8-pin power plug 8-pin power plug 8-pin power plug 8-pin power plug
2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or flashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button ATX power button/soft-off button ATX power button/soft-off button ATX power button/soft-off button ATX power button/soft-off button (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. 17. 17. 17. 17. 17. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. The sytem panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. Refer to the connector description below for details. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE System panel connector * Requires an A TX power supply . P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker Ground RESET Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED PLED SPEAKER
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the first time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST. While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Error Error Error Error Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4.
3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Powering off the computer 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows î 2000: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then click Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK OK OK OK O K button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î XP: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then select Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 4 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-11 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-14 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-19 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-33 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-38 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-43
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable floppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable floppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS file fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a floppy disk or the motherboard support CD.) 4. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. b. Click Start Start Start Start Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My My My My My Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File File File File File from the menu, then select Format Format Format Format Format . A Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows î î î î î XP users: XP users: XP users: XP users: XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup disk disk disk disk disk from the format options field, then click Start Start Start Start Start . Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS file in DOS environment using a bootable floppy disk with the updated BIOS file. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS file that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS To copy the current BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: Windows î 2000 environment To create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start Start Start Start Start , then select Run Run Run Run Run . d. In the Open Open Open Open Open field, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D is your optical drive letter. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS file to the bootable floppy disk. Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[filename] where the [filename] is any user-assigned filename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main filename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.ROM ⢠Make sure that the floppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1.2 MB free space to save the file. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS file. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS file to the floppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... done Write to file...... ok A:\> 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[filename] where [filename] is the latest or the original BIOS file on the bootable floppy disk. Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file To update the BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard. Save the BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5LD2E.ROM Write the BIOS filename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS filename at the DOS prompt.
4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5LD2E.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during flash BIOS Reading file ....... done Reading flash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing flash ...... done Writing flash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility verifies the file and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! A:\>afudos /iP5LD2E.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during flash BIOS Reading file ....... done Reading flash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing flash ...... done Writing flash ...... done Verifying flash .... done Please restart your computer A:\>
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS file when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS file using the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk that contains the updated BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk To recover the BIOS from a floppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the floppy disk with the original or updated BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âÂÂP5LD2E.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start flashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS file and starts flashing the corrupted BIOS file. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS file in the floppy disk to P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM .
4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading file âÂÂP5LD2E.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start flashing... When no floppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS file. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy...
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a floppy disk and using a DOS-based utility. The EZ Flash utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self Tests (POST). To update the BIOS using EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard and rename the same to P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM . 2. Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk, then restart the system. 3. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. When the correct BIOS file is found, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âÂÂP5LD2E.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start erasing.......| Start programming...| Flashed successfully. Rebooting. ⢠Do not shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! ⢠A âÂÂFloppy not found!â error message appears if there is no floppy disk in the drive. A âÂÂP5LD2E.ROM not found!â error message appears if the correct BIOS file is not found in the floppy disk. Make sure that you rename the BIOS file to P5LD2E.ROM.
4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX . See page 5-4 for the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities screen menu. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or click Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select . Click Next Next Next Next Next . Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . T h e ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next .
4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file To update the BIOS through a BIOS file: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a file file file file file option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS file from the Open Open Open Open Open window, then click Save Save Save Save Save . 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable firmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the firmware hub. The firmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Load Load Load Load Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ4.7 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for this motherboard.
4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main Main Main Main Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power Power Power Power Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot Boot Boot Boot Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys General help General help General help General help General help Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main Main Main Main Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- configurable, you can change the value of the field opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a field, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not fit on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 General help General help General help General help General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4] Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window
4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main Main Main Main Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. Configuration options: [English] [Français] [Deutsch] [Japanese] [Chinese (GB)] [Chinese BIG5] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit System Time [11:51:19] System Date [Thu 05/07/2004] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master : [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave : [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-configurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are specifically configuring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Configuration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Select the type of device connected to the system. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled]
4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the configurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to configure the item. Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Sets the configuration for the Serial ATA connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial ATA features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, or the Intel î Matrix Storage Technology configuration from the Serial ATA hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. If you want to use the Serial ATA hard disk drives as Parallel ATA physical storage devices, set this item to [Standard IDE]. If you want the Serial ATA hard disk drives to use the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), set this item to [AHCI]. For details on AHCI, go to: www.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm www.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012305.htm The SATA controller is set to Native mode when this item is set to [RAID] or [AHCI]. IDE Configuration Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] When in AHCI/RAID mode SATA controller is forced to Native mode.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Disables or allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced Mode] if you are using native OS including Windows î 2000/XP. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] Allows you to use native OS on Serial ATA and Parallel ATA ports. It is recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility. In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel ATA ports only if you do not install any Serial ATA device. The P-ATA S-ATA and P-ATA options are for advanced users only. If you set to any of these options and encountered problems, revert to the default setting S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA . Configuration options: [S-ATA P-ATA] [S-ATA] [P-ATA] The Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode and its sub-menu items appear only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [Standard IDE]. Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM [Disabled] Enables or disables the onboard Serial ATA boot ROM. This item appears only when the Configure SATA As item is set as RAID. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM appears only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [RAID]. ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Agressive Link Power Management (ALPE) and Aggressive Slumber/Partial (ASP) management features. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] AHCI Port 3 Interlock Switch [Disabled] Enables or disables the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) Port 3 interlock switch. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP and its sub-menu items appear only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [AHCI]. IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Configuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35]
4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 System Information System Information System Information System Information System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system specifications. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU specification System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AMIBIOS Version : 0118 Build Date : 04/19/05 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 2.80GHz Speed : 2800 MHz Count : 2 System Memory Size : 1024MB Appropriated : 0MB Available : 1024MB
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. JumperFree Configuration LAN Cable Status USB Configuration CPU Configuration Chipset Onboard Devices Configuration PCIPnP 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] Allows you to select the overclocking options to achieve the desired CPU internal frequency. Select either one of the preset overclocking configiuration options. Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Loads the optimal settings for the system. Extreme Extreme Extreme Extreme Extreme Loads the standard settings for the system. AI Overclock AI Overclock AI Overclock AI Overclock AI Overclock Loads overclocking profiles with optimal parameters for stability when overclocking. AI N.O.S. AI N.O.S. AI N.O.S. AI N.O.S. AI N.O.S. The ASUS AI Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boost the performance for the most demanding tasks. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Adjust system frequency/voltage. Configure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclocking [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto]
4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency FSB 1066 266 MHz FSB 800 200 MHz FSB 533 133 MHz DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR2 operating frequency. Configuration options: [Auto] [DDR2-400MHz] [DDR2-533MHz] [DDR2-600MHz] [DDR-667MHz] Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. The following item appears only when you set the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item to [Manual]. CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > < > < > < > < > and <-> <-> <-> <-> < - > keys to adjust the CPU frequency. You can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 450. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency. This item is set to [Auto] by default. Configuration options: [Auto] [90]...[150] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] Allows you to synchronize the PCI frequency with the PCI Express or CPU frequency. Configuration options: [To CPU] [33.33MHz] [ Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Allows enhanced system performance. Setting to [Turbo] may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto]. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Turbo]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 The following items also appear when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [Manual] or [AI NOS]. Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the DDR2 reference voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.80V] [1.90V] [1.95V] [2.00V] [2.10V] [2.15V] [2.20V] [2.30V] Refer to the DDR2 documentation before adjusting the memory voltage. Setting a very high memory voltage may damage the memory module(s)! CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] Sets the operating VCore voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.7000V] [1.6875V] [1.6750V] [1.6625V] [1.6500V] [1.6375V] [1.6250V] [1.6125V] [1.6000V] [1.5875V] [1.5750V] [1.5625V] [1.5500V] [1.5375V] [1.5250V] [1.5125V] [1.5000V] [1.4875V] [1.4750V] [1.4625V] [1.4500V] [1.4375V] [1.4250V] [1.4125V] [1.4000V] [1.3875V] [1.3750V] [1.3625V] [1.3500V] [1.3375V] [1.3250V] [1.3125V] [1.3000V] [1.2875V] [1.2750V] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the front side bus termination voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.20V] [1.30V] [1.40V] [1.50V] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the memory controller hub (MCH) voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.50V] [1.55V] [1.60V] [1.65V] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the I/O controller hub (ICH) voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.05V] [1.20V] Setting to a very high CPU VCore voltage can damage the CPU or may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to default settings.
4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. N.O.S. Mode [Auto] Sets the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode. Select either of the following configuration options: [Auto] [Manual] Sensitivity [Sensitive] Sets the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode sensitivity. Select either of the following configuration options: Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal - activates overclocking on a threshold between light and heavy CPU loading. Sensitive Sensitive Sensitive Sensitive Sensitive - activates overclocking on a light CPU loading. Less-Sensitive Less-Sensitive Less-Sensitive Less-Sensitive Less-Sensitive - activates overclocking on a heavy CPU loading. Target Frequency [Overclock 3%] Allows you to set the target frequency. Configuration options: [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [Overclock Profile]. Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Allows you to overclock the CPU speed through the available preset values. Configuration options: [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] [FSB888/DDR2-667] [FSB960/DDR2-800] [FSB1280/DDR2-800] [FSB1333/DDR2-667] [FSB1333/DDR2-834]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status This menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable LAN cable check during POST. When enabled, the menu reports the cable faults or shorts, and displays the point (length) where the fault or short is detected. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 Open 0.0M 3-6 Open 0.0M 4-5 Open 0.0M 7-8 Open 0.0M Check LAN cable during POST.
4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] Enables or disables the USB function. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). Configuration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] Allows you to enable support for operating systems without an EHCI hand-off feature. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] The Module Version Module Version Module Version Module Version Module Version and USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None None None None None . USB Configuration Module Version - 2.24.0-F.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] Enables USB host controllers.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Sets the ratio between the CPU core clock and the Front Side Bus frequency. The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. Configuration options: [ 8]...[28] You can only adjust the Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS i f you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. VID CMOS Setting [ 62] VID CMOS Setting [ 62] VID CMOS Setting [ 62] VID CMOS Setting [ 62] VID CMOS Setting [ 62] Allows you to set the VID CMOS setting at which the processor is to run. The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. The following item appears only when you install a CPU that supports the lock free feature. Only some latest CPUs support this feature. CPU Lock Free [Auto] CPU Lock Free [Auto] CPU Lock Free [Auto] CPU Lock Free [Auto] CPU Lock Free [Auto] Allows you to adjust the CPU multiplier to 14x. Setting this item to [Auto] allows the motherboard to automatically reduce the CPU multiplier value for more flexibility when increasing the external FSB. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the microcode updation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Configure Advanced CPU settings Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 2800 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Cache L3 : 0 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:14, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value : 14 Ratio CMOS Setting: [ 14] VID CMOS Setting: [ 62] CPU Lock Free [Auto] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ.
4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] When set to [Auto], the BIOS automatically checks the CPUâÂÂs capability to enable the C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU power consumption is lower when idle. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the CPU Internal Thermal Control function. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading Technology. Refer to the Appendix for more information on the Hyper-Threading Technology. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î D or Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST). Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology. When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Set this item to [Maximum] or [Disabled] i f you do not want to use the EIST. The CPU constantly operates at a lower internal frequency when you set this item t o [Minimum]. Configuration options: [Maximum] [Minimum] [Automatic] [Disabled] ⢠Refer to the Appendix for details on how to use the EIST feature. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS file that supports EIST.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [6 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [6 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [6 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 Clocks] Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] ~ [18 Clocks] DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [6 Clocks] 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/Int-VG] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] Enable or disable DRAM timing.
4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Hyper Path 3 feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [PCI Express/PCI] [PCI/PCI Express] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Allows you to disable or select the internal graphics mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled, 1MB] [Enabled, 8MB] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Sets the length of the PCI Express graphics card buffer. Configuration options: [Auto] [Long] [Short] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card link latency. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Allows you to enable, disable, or set to automatic the PCI Express graphics card root control. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics link mode. Setting this item to [Auto] allows the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system configuration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PEG Link Mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card slot power. Configuration options: [Auto] [Light] [Normal] [Heavy] [Heavier] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] Disables or sets the priority port based on the ICHT PCI Express port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [PCI Express Port 5] [PCI Express Port 6] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] Sets the 2nd PCI Express slot mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [x2 Mode [Fast]] [x4 Mode [Faster]]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration HD Audio Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the high-definition audio CODEC. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAAF) mode to legacy ACâÂÂ97 or highâÂÂdefinition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. Configuration options: [AC97] [HD Audio] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard IEEE 1394 controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Gigabit LAN controller does not support S5 Wake-On-LAN function under DOS mode or Windows î ME. Configure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] ITE8212F Controller [Enabled] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Enable or disable High Definition Audio Controller. LAN Option ROM [Disabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller. This item appears only when the Onboard Onboard Onboard Onboard Onboard PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN items are set to Enabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Allows you to set the onboard Silicon Image SATA RAID controller mode. Configuration options: [SATA2 Mode] [RAID Mode] [Disabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard ITE î 8211F IDE controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Sets the time the ITE8211F IDE RAID controller detects devices connected to the IDE RAID connectors. Configuration options: [Standard Mode] [Quick Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Configuration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to [ECP]. This item allows you to set the Parallel Port ECP DMA. Configuration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Allows you to select the Game Port address or to disable the port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [200/300] [200/330] [208/300] [208/330]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS configures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system configures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Configuration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. NO: Lets the BIOS configue all the devices in the system. YES: Lets the operating system configure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system.
4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Configuration options: [Yes] [No] 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 specifications. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend.
4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Configuration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the first try. Turning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is off causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Go into On/Off or Suspend when Power button is pressed. Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI Express LAN device. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Space Bar] [Ctrl-Esc] [Power Key] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [32.5úC/90.5úF] MB Temperature [36.0úC/96.5úF] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [3813 RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Fan1 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.320V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 12V Voltage [11.880V] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Disabled] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the field shows N/A. CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efficient system operation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode and CPU FAN PROFILE MODE CPU FAN PROFILE MODE CPU FAN PROFILE MODE CPU FAN PROFILE MODE C P U F A N P R O F I L E M O D E items appear only when the CPU Q-Fan Control is Enabled. CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] Allows you to select the type of CPU fan cable connected to the CPU fan connector. Set to [PWM] when using a 4-pin CPU fan cable. Set to [DC] when using a 3-pin CPU fan cable. Configuration options: [PWM] [DC] Some CPU fans with a 4-pin cable do not comply with Intel î âÂÂs PWM fan specification. When using this type of CPU fan, you can not reduce the CPU fan speed even if you set the CPU Q-Fan Mode to [PWM].
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Sets the chassis fan profile mode. Configuration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the power fan connector, the specific field shows N/A. VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Sets the CPU fan profile mode. Configuration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speeds in rotations per minute (RPM). If any of the fans is not connected to the chassis, the specific field shows N/A. Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Allows ysou to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the chassis fan speeds for more efficient system operation. When enabled, the chassis fan ratio is the same with the selected CPU fan ratio. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE item appears only when the Chassis Q-Fan1 Control Chassis Q-Fan1 Control Chassis Q-Fan1 Control Chassis Q-Fan1 Control Chassis Q-Fan1 Control i s Enabled.
4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Configuration Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Drives Boot Settings Configuration Security 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device sequence of available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST330620A] 3rd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S360] 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 Hard Disk Drives Hard Disk Drives Hard Disk Drives Hard Disk Drives Hard Disk Drives 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] These items specify the boot device sequence of available disk drives. The number of disk drives that appear on the screen depends on the number of drives installed in the system. Configuration options: [XXXXXXX] [Disabled] Hard Disk Drives 1st Drive [XXXXXXXXX] 2nd Drive [XXXXXXXXX]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-39 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. Configuration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system.
4-40 4-40 4-40 4-40 4-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.4 4.6.4 4.6.4 4.6.4 4.6.4 Security Security Security Security Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password item, then press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Change Supervisor Change Supervisor Change Supervisor Change Supervisor Password Password Password Password Password then press <Enter>. The message âÂÂPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Configuration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access No Access No Access No Access No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only View Only View Only View Only View Only allows access but does not allow change to any field. Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited allows changes only to selected fields, such as Date and Time. Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access allows viewing and changing all the fields in the Setup utility. Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password User Password User Password User Password User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]
4-42 4-42 4-42 4-42 4-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [Always] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the boot sector virus protection. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-43 Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to fields other than System Date, System Time, and Password, the BIOS asks for a confirmation before exiting. Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a confirmation appears. Select Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Once you are finished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the computer is turned off. When you select this option, a confirmation window appears. Select Ok Ok Ok Ok O k to save the changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. 4.7 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items.
4-44 4-44 4-44 4-44 4-44 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a confirmation window appears. Select Ok Ok Ok Ok O k to load default values. Select Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit & Save Changes & Save Changes & Save Changes & Save Changes & Save Changes o r make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 5 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-9 5.5 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-17 5.6 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-39
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î 2000/2003 Server/XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers D r i v e r s menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary. Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only. Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack1 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website(www.asus.com) for updates. Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to display support display support display support display support display support CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard information information information information information Click to view and Click to view and Click to view and Click to view and Click to view and install additional install additional install additional install additional install additional drivers drivers drivers drivers drivers
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update Installs the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 component update for the USB 1.1/2.0 drivers. Install this update before you install the Intel î Chipset Inf Update Program. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program This item installs the Intel î Chipset INF Update Program. This driver enables Plug-n-Play INF support for the Intel î chipset components on the motherboard. When installed to the target system, this driver provides the method for configuring the chipset components. You can install this utility using three different modes: interactive, silent, or unattended preload. Installing the driver in interactive mode requires user input during installation. User input is not required when installing the driver in silent or unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme file that came with the utility for details. Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Allows you to create an ICH7R RAID driver disk for a 32/64-bit system. Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Installs the Realtek î ALC882M audio driver and application. See page 5-12 for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Allows you to create an ITE8211 IDE driver disk for a 32/64-bit system. Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Allows you to create a Silicon Image î RAID/Serial ATA driver disk for a 32-bit system. Click to display more items. Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Allows you to create a Silicon Image î RAID/Serial ATA driver disk for a 64-bit system. USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver. Click to go back to the previous screen.
5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. ASUS PC Probe II ASUS PC Probe II ASUS PC Probe II ASUS PC Probe II ASUS PC Probe II This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update Allows you to download the latest version of the BIOS from the ASUS website. Before using the ASUS Update, make sure that you have an Internet connection so you can connect to the ASUS website. ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver Bring life to your computer screen by installing the ASUS screen saver. ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader Installs the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader that allows you to open, view, and print documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Installs the Microsoft î DirectX 9.0c driver.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster Installs the ASUS AI Booster software. Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application The anti-virus application detects and protects your computer from viruses that destroys data. 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu The Manuals menu contains a list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. Most user manual files are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader from the Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu before opening a user manual file.
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information Click the Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also find this information on the inside front cover of this user guide. 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 Other information Other information Other information Other information Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the specified information. Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Displays the general specifications of the motherboard.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Displays the support CD contents in graphical format. Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Displays the ASUS Technical Support Request Form that you have to fill out when requesting technical support.
5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD and a brief description of each in text format.
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme file that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On Self-Tests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section âÂÂ5.2.3 Utilities menuâ for details. To launch the ASUS MyLogo2â¢: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility. Refer to section âÂÂ4.1.5 ASUS Update utilityâ for details. 2. Select Options Options Options Options Options from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS , then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS file, then click Next Next Next Next N e x t. The ASUS MyLogo2 window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo2â¢, use the Award BIOS Flash utility to make a copy of your original BIOS file, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section âÂÂ4.1.2 Updating the BIOSâÂÂ. ⢠Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo i s set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See section âÂÂ4.6.3 Boot Settings ConfigurationâÂÂ. ⢠You can create your own boot logo image in GIF, JPG, or BMP file formats.
5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility, flash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After flashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST. 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 3. Click the Run Run Run Run R u n button to perform a cable test. 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 The Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester⢠(VCT) is a cable diagnostic utility that reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology. The VCT detects and reports open and shorted cables, impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems, and pair skew problems of up to 100 meters at one meter accuracy. The VCT feature reduces networking and support costs through a highly manageable and controlled network system. This utility can be incorporated in the network systems sofware for ideal field support as well as development diagnostics. Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠To use the the Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester⢠utility: 1. Launch the VCT utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester . 2. Click Virtual Cable Virtual Cable Virtual Cable Virtual Cable Virtual Cable Tester Tester Tester Tester Tester from the menu to display the screen below. ⢠The VCT only runs on systems with Windows î XP or Windows î 2000 operating systems. ⢠The Run Run Run Run R u n button on the Virtual Cable Tester⢠main window is disabled if no problem is detected on the LAN cable(s) connected to the LAN port(s). ⢠If you want the system to check the LAN cable before entering the OS, enable the POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable item in the BIOS. See section âÂÂ4.4.2 LAN Cable Statusâ for details.
5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations The Realtek î ALC882M audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software provides Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF Out support, and interrupt capability. The ALC882M also includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for all audio ports, eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Enjoy true home theatre experience with the following advanced sound technologies: Dolby Prologic IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker, and Dolby Digital Live. Follow the installation wizard to install the Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek î î î î î Audio Driver Audio Driver Audio Driver Audio Driver Audio Driver from the support CD that came with the motherboard package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will find the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the taskbar. From the taskbar, double-click on the SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect icon to display the Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager . Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Control Control Control Control Control settings settings settings settings settings window window window window window Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration options options options options options Information Information Information Information Information button button button button button Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Tool button Tool button Tool button Tool button Tool button Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby î î î î î feature feature feature feature feature launch buttons launch buttons launch buttons launch buttons launch buttons Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit button button button button button Minimize Minimize Minimize Minimize Minimize button button button button button
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 Information Information Information Information Information Click the information button ( ) to display information about the audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller, audio codec, and language setting. Tools Tools Tools Tools Tools Click the tool button ( ) to display tools for supported Dolby î applications. Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby î î î î î Feature Launch buttons Feature Launch buttons Feature Launch buttons Feature Launch buttons Feature Launch buttons Click the button of the feature you want to launch. Minimize Minimize Minimize Minimize Minimize Click the minimize button ( ) to minimize the window display. Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit Click the exit button ( ) to exit the Realtek HD Audio Manager. Configuration options Configuration options Configuration options Configuration options Configuration options Click any of the tabs in this area to configure your audio settings. Click the arrow button ( ) to display more options.
5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Sound Effect The Realtek î ALC882D Audio CODEC allows you to set your listening environment, adjust the equalizer, set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. To set the sound effect options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Sound Sound Sound Sound Sound Effect Effect Effect Effect Effect tab. 2. Click the shortcut buttons or the drop-down menus for options on changing the acoustic environment, adjust the equalizer, or set the karaoke to your desired settings. 3. Click to effect the Sound Effect settings and exit. Mixer The Mixer option allows you to configure audio output (playback) volume and audio input (record) volume. To set the mixer options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Mixer Mixer Mixer Mixer Mixer tab. 2. Turn the volume buttons to adjust the Playback and/or Record volume. The Mixer option activates voice input from all channels by default. Make sure to set all channels to mute ( ) if you do not want voice input. 3. Make adjustments to Wave, SW Synth, Front, Rear, Subwoofer, CD volume, Mic volume, Line Volume, and Stereo mix by clicking the control tabs and dragging them up and down until you get the desired levels. 4. Click to effect the Mixer settings and exit.
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 Bass Management setting Click this tab to manage your bass settings. To set the bass management options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Bass Bass Bass Bass Bass Management setting Management setting Management setting Management setting Management setting tab. 2. Click <M> to display the distance in meters, or <FT> to display the distance in feet. 3. Adjust the values to your desired settings by entering a numeric value in the boxes, or clicking the up/down arrow. 4. Click to test your settings. 5. Click to effect the Bass Management settings and exit. Audio I/O The Audio I/O option allows you configure your input/output settings. To set the Audio I/O options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Audio I/O Audio I/O Audio I/O Audio I/O Audio I/O tab. 2. Click the drop-down menu to select the channel configuration. 3. The control settings window displays the status of connected devices. Click for analog and digital options. 4. Click <OK> to effect the Audio I/O settings and exit
5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Microphone The Microphone option allows you configure your input/output settings and to check if your audio devices are connected properly. To set the Microphone options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Microphone Microphone Microphone Microphone Microphone tab. 2. Click the Noise Suppression option button to reduce the static background noise when recording. 3. Click the Acoustic Echo Cancellation option button to reduce the echo from the front speakers when recording. 4. Click to effect the Microphone settings and exit. 3D Audio Demo The 3D Audio Demo option gives you a demonstration of the 3D audio feature. To start the 3D Audio Demo: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the 3D Audio 3D Audio 3D Audio 3D Audio 3D Audio Demo Demo Demo Demo Demo tab. 2. Click the option buttons to change the sound, moving path, or environment settings. 3. Click to test your settings. 4. Click to effect the 3D Audio Demo settings and exit.
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5.5 RAID configurations The motherboard comes with the Silicon Image Sil3132 and the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge RAID controllers that allow you to configure IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID configurations. RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 i s data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 configuration you get all the benefits of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 configurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 configuration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity. The RAID 5 configuration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 i s a striped configuration with RAID 1 segments whose segments are RAID 1 arrays. This configuration has the same fault tolerance as RAID 1, and has the same overhead for fault-tolerance as mirroring alone. RAID 10 achieves high input/output rates by striping RAID 1 segments. In some instances, a RAID 10 configuration can sustain multiple simultaneous drive failure. A minimum of four hard disk drives is required for this setup. JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet configured as a RAID set. This configuration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance benefits.
5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks The motherboard supports Ultra DMA /133/100/66 and Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks To install IDE hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Set the jumpers of each hard disk as Master/Master or Slave/Slave. 2. Install the hard disks into the drive bays. 3. Connect the HDD signal cables. 4. Connect a 4-pin power cable to the power connector on each drive. Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy first the RAID driver from the support CD to a floppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ5.6 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. Refer to the RAID controllers user manual on the support CD for detailed information on RAID configurations. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage . The Intel î Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH7R chip allows you to create a RAID 0 and a RAID 1 set using only two identical hard disk drives. The Intel î Matrix Storage technology creates two partitions on each hard disk drive to create a virtual RAID 0 and RAID 1 sets. This technology also allows you to change the hard disk drive partition size without losing any data.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations This motherboard supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), RAID 5, and Intel î Matrix Storage configurations for Serial ATA hard disks drives through the Intel î ICH7R SouthBridge chip. Setting the RAID item in BIOS Setting the RAID item in BIOS Setting the RAID item in BIOS Setting the RAID item in BIOS Setting the RAID item in BIOS You must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set(s). To do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST. 2. Go to the Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu , select IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration , then press <Enter>. 3. Select the item Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As , then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 4. Select RAID RAID RAID RAID RAID from the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the item Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM , press <Enter>, then select Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled from the options. 6. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup.
5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial ATA hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial ATA connectors supported by the Southbridge. To enter the Intel î Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility: 1. Install all the Serial ATA hard disk drives. 2. Turn on the system. 3. During POST, press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None defined. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) To create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0(Stripe) RAID 0(Stripe) RAID 0(Stripe) RAID 0(Stripe) RAID 0(Stripe) , then press <Enter>. 4. When the Disks Disks Disks Disks Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to configure as RAID. This pop-up screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection.
5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 8. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1(Mirror) RAID 1(Mirror) RAID 1(Mirror) RAID 1(Mirror) RAID 1(Mirror) , then press <Enter>. 4. When the Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity item is highlighted, key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 5. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A XX.X GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to main menu or <N> to go back to Create Volume menu.
5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) To create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume10 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB XXX.X GB Create Volume 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10(RAID0 1) RAID 10(RAID0 1) RAID 10(RAID0 1) RAID 10(RAID0 1) RAID 10(RAID0 1) , then press <Enter>. 4. When the Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 10 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 5. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want then press <Enter> when the Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) To create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume5 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 64KB 0.0 GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 7. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 6. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 5 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5(Parity) RAID 5(Parity) RAID 5(Parity) RAID 5(Parity) RAID 5(Parity) , then press <Enter>.
5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 4. The Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to configure as RAID. The following pop-up screen appears. [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the drive you want to set, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. 6. When the Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 5 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4KB to 128KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter> when the Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 8. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 Deleting a RAID set Deleting a RAID set Deleting a RAID set Deleting a RAID set Deleting a RAID set Take caution when deleting a RAID set. You will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. To delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete Volume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! Are you sure you want to delete volume âÂÂVolumeXâÂÂ? (Y/N): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ]
5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Exiting the Intel Exiting the Intel Exiting the Intel Exiting the Intel Exiting the Intel î î î î î Matrix Storage Manager utility Matrix Storage Manager utility Matrix Storage Manager utility Matrix Storage Manager utility Matrix Storage Manager utility To exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit , then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Take caution before you reset a RAID volume HDD to non-RAID. Resetting a RAID volume HDD deletes all internal RAID structure on the drive. To reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A confirmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. [ RESET RAID DATA ] Resetting RAID data will remove internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures, the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5.5.3 5.5.3 5.5.3 5.5.3 5.5.3 Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations The Silicon Image RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, JBOD, and RAID 5 configurations. Use the Silicon Image RAID utility to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration menu item in the BIOS set the Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller item to RAID Mode. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. 3. Save your changes and Exit Setup. Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launch the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager from Windows î XP by clicking the Start Start Start Start Start button and selecting All Programs > Silicon Image > All Programs > Silicon Image > All Programs > Silicon Image > All Programs > Silicon Image > All Programs > Silicon Image > RAID5SATA RAID5SATA RAID5SATA RAID5SATA RAID5SATA ⢠For details on the Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID configuration, refer to the âÂÂSil3132 UserâÂÂs Manualâ in your motherboard support CD. ⢠Use a Serial ATA port multiplier if you want to configure a RAID 5, RAID 10 or CONCATENATION set. ⢠Use an external SATA box to configure a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠The Serial ATA port multiplier and external SATA box are purchased separately. ⢠Make sure to install the Silicon Image SATA Link Sil 3132 driver and the Silicon Image RAID 5 Array Management Utility from the support CD before using RAID 5 configuration. Do not unplug the external Serial ATA external box when a RAID 0 or RAID 1 was configured.
5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility To enter the Silicon Image BIOS RAID configuration utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. During POST, press <Ctrl S> or <F4>. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only, and may not exactly match the items on your screen. The Main Menu on the upper left corner allows you to select an operation to be performed. The Main Menu options include the following: Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set - creates a new legacy RAID set or allocates spare drives. Delete RAID set Delete RAID set Delete RAID set Delete RAID set Delete RAID set - deletes a RAID set or deallocates a spare drive. Rebuild RAID1 set Rebuild RAID1 set Rebuild RAID1 set Rebuild RAID1 set Rebuild RAID1 set - rebuilds a RAID 1 set (e.g. swapped drives). Resolve Conflicts Resolve Conflicts Resolve Conflicts Resolve Conflicts Resolve Conflicts - automatically restores disrupted drives on a RAID set. Low Level Format Low Level Format Low Level Format Low Level Format Low Level Format - creates a pattern of reference marks on a drive. Formatting the disks erases all data previously stored in the drive. Logical Drive Info Logical Drive Info Logical Drive Info Logical Drive Info Logical Drive Info - shows the current configuration of each RAID set. On the upper right corner of the screen is the Help message box. The message describes the function of each menu item. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options. The following lists the keys found in the legend box and their corresponding functions. â , , , , , â : Select/Move to the next item ESC ESC ESC ESC E S C : Previous Menu Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter : Select Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E : Exit Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2004 âÂÂâ :Select Menu ESC:Previous Menu Enter:Select Ctrl-E:Exit MAIN MENU PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB LOGICAL DRIVE HELP Press âÂÂEnterâ to create RAID set
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual configuration configuration configuration configuration configuration a n d press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) To create a RAID set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter> to display an option menu. 2. Select RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 then press <Enter> to display the following. 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration the press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. c. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration By default, Auto configuration sets the stripe size to 64K and sets the logical drives based on the physical drives installed. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION
5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 2. Select RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration c. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. d. Repeat step c to set the second, third, and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. e. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. f. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB c. Repeat step b to select the target drive . d. After selecting the source and target drives, the following pop-up menu appears. Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual configuration configuration configuration configuration configuration and press <Enter>. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drives menu. b. Using the up or down arrow keys, select the source drive and press <Enter>. 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. c. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. ⢠Auto-configuration creates a RAID 1 set without a backup copy of the current source disk data. ⢠When migrating a single hard disk drive to a RAID 1 set, use of the Manual configuration is recommended. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Create with data copy Create without data copy ⢠The Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy option allows you to copy the current data from the source drive to the mirror drive. ⢠Select Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy i f you have important data in your source drive. ⢠The Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy option disables the disk copy function of the Mirrored set. ⢠If you selected Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy , the RAID 1 set must be repartitioned and reformatted to guarantee the consistency of its contents.
5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support e. If you selected Create with data Create with data Create with data Create with data Create with data copy copy copy copy c o p y, the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration online copy offline copy The online copy online copy online copy online copy online copy option automatically copies the data to the target drives on the background while writing to the source drives. The offline offline offline offline offline copy copy copy copy copy option allows you to copy the contents of the source drive to the target drives now. f. Use the up or down arrow keys to select desired copy method, then press <Enter>. g. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. h. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. A copy progress appears if you previously selected offline copy. 2. Select RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) To create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. c. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual configuration configuration configuration configuration configuration a n d press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB c. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. d. Repeat step c to set the second, third and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. e. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. f. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu.
5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. c. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. Auto-configuration creates a RAID 10 set without a backup copy of the current source disk data. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual configuration configuration configuration configuration configuration a n d press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. 2. Select RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) To create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 The online copy online copy online copy online copy online copy option automatically copies the data to the target drives on the background while writing to the source drives. The offline offline offline offline offline copy copy copy copy copy option allows you to copy the contents of the source drive to the target drives now. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB c. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. d. Repeat step c to set the second, third, and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. ⢠The Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy option allows you to copy the current data from the source drive to the mirror drive. The Create Create Create Create Create without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy option disables the disk copy function of the Mirrored set. ⢠If you selected Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy , the RAID 1 set must be repartitioned and reformatted to guarantee the consistency of its contents. ⢠Select Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy i f you have important data in your source drive. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Create with data copy Create without data copy e. After setting the RAID drives, the following pop-up menu appears. f. If you selected Create with data Create with data Create with data Create with data Create with data copy copy copy copy c o p y, the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration online copy offline copy
5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support g. Use the up or down arrow keys to select desired copy method, then press <Enter>. h. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. i. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. A copy progress appears if you previously selected offline copy. ⢠You can also create a RAID set using the SATARAID5 GUI utility under a Windows î environment. ⢠For details on the Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID 5 configuration, refer to the âÂÂSil3132 UserâÂÂs Manualâ found in your motherboard support CD. Configure a CONCATENATION set when using a single Serial ATA drive; otherwise, the system will not recognize the drive. Creating a CONCATENATION set Creating a CONCATENATION set Creating a CONCATENATION set Creating a CONCATENATION set Creating a CONCATENATION set To create a CONCATENATION set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter>. 2. From the sub-menu Select CONCATENATION CONCATENATION CONCATENATION CONCATENATION CONCATENATION then press <Enter>. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set a drive for the RAID set. 4. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. 5. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-39 5-39 5-39 5-39 5-39 5.6 Creating a RAID driver disk A floppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. You can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD) or in Windows î environment. To create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart your computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the first boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart your computer. 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. 6. Place a blank, high-density floppy disk to the floppy disk drive, then press <7>. The following message displays on screen. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 1) Make ICH7 RAID/AHCI 32bits Driver Disk 2) Make ICH7 RAID/AHCI 64bits Driver Disk 3) Make ITE8211 32bits Driver Disk 4) Make ITE8211 64bits Driver Disk 5) Make Sil3132 RAID 32bits Driver Disk 6) Make Sil3132 SATA 32bits Driver Disk 7) Format floppy disk 8) FreeDOS command prompt Please choose 1 ~ 8 7. Press <Enter> to format the floppy disk. 8. When finished, select the type of RAID driver disk you want to create by typing the number preceding the option, then press <Enter>. For example, if you want to create an ICH7R SATA RAID driver disk, press <1>. The following message appears on screen. Insert new diskette for drive B:\ and press ENTER when ready... Please insert your formatted floppy to drive B:\ Press a key to continue.
5-40 5-40 5-40 5-40 5-40 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 3. Insert floppy disk to floppy disk drive. 4. Follow succeeding screen information to complete process. 5. Write-protect the floppy disk to avoid computer virus infection. To install the RAID driver: 1. During the OS installation, the system prompts you to press the F6 key to install third-party SCSI or RAID driver. 2. Press <F6> then insert the floppy disk with RAID driver into the floppy disk drive. 3. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation. Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.2 Drivers menuâ for details. 9. The RAID drivers are copied to the floppy disk. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the floppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. 10. Press any key to return to the Makedisk menu. To create a RAID driver disk: 1. Place the motherboard support CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. When the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears, select the RAID driver disk you want to create: ⢠Click Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk t o create a 32-bit or 64-bit ITE î 8211F driver disk. ⢠Click Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk o r Make ICH7 Make ICH7 Make ICH7 Make ICH7 Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk 64 bit RAID Driver Disk 64 bit RAID Driver Disk 64 bit RAID Driver Disk 64 bit RAID Driver Disk t o create a 32-bit or 64-bit Silicon Image RAID driver disk. ⢠Click Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk o r Make Make Make Make Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk t o create a Silicon Image RAID driver disk. Or Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility. ⢠Go to \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk for the Silicon Image RAID driver disk utility. ⢠Go to \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk for the Intel î ICH7R RAID driver disk utility. ⢠Go to \Drivers\Sil3132 \Drivers\Sil3132 \Drivers\Sil3132 \Drivers\Sil3132 \Drivers\Sil3132 for the Silicon Image RAID driver disk utility.
A CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features that the motherboard supports.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary A A.1 Intel î EM64T ........................................................................ A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe A.1 Intel î EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î Pentium î D or Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS file that supports EM64T. You can download the latest BIOS file from the ASUS website (www.asus.com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS file. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Visit www.microsoft.com for more information on Windows î 64-bit OS. Using the Intel Using the Intel Using the Intel Using the Intel Using the Intel î î î î î EM64T feature EM64T feature EM64T feature EM64T feature EM64T feature To use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T. 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows î Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any. Refer to the expansion card or add-on device(s) documentation, or visit the related website, to verify if the card/device supports a 64-bit system. A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS file that supports EIST. You can download the latest BIOS file from the ASUS website (www.asus.com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A.2.1 A.2.1 A.2.1 A.2.1 A.2.1 System requirements System requirements System requirements System requirements System requirements Before using EIST, check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠Intel î Pentium î 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS file with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î XP SP2/Windows î Server 2003 SP1/Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions)
A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features A.2.2 A.2.2 A.2.2 A.2.2 A.2.2 Using the EIST Using the EIST Using the EIST Using the EIST Using the EIST To use the EIST feature: 1. Turn on the computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 2. Go to the Advanced Menu Advanced Menu Advanced Menu Advanced Menu Advanced Menu , highlight CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-26 for details. 4. Press <F10> to save your changes and exit the BIOS setup. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Properties Properties Properties Properties Properties from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties window appears, click the Screen Saver Screen Saver Screen Saver Screen Saver Screen Saver tab. 7. Click the Power Power Power Power Power button on the Monitor power section to open the Power Options Power Options Power Options Power Options Power Options Properties Properties Properties Properties Properties window. 8. On the Power schemes Power schemes Power schemes Power schemes Power schemes section, click , then select any option except Home/Office Desktop Home/Office Desktop Home/Office Desktop Home/Office Desktop Home/Office Desktop or Always On Always On Always On Always On Always On . 9. Click Apply Apply Apply Apply Apply , then click OK OK OK OK OK . 10. Close the Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties window. After you adjust the power scheme, the CPU internal frequency slightly decreases when the CPU loading is low. The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hyper-Threading Technology is supported under Windows î XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www.intel.com/info/hyperthreading. Using the Hyper-Threading Technology Using the Hyper-Threading Technology Using the Hyper-Threading Technology Using the Hyper-Threading Technology Using the Hyper-Threading Technology To use the Hyper-Threading Technology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Menu Menu Menu Menu M e n u, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology i s set to Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled . See page 4-26 for details. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 3. Restart the computer.
A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features
ii ii ii ii ii E2099 E2099 E2099 E2099 E2099 Revised Edition V2 Revised Edition V2 Revised Edition V2 Revised Edition V2 Revised Edition V2 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair , modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECT ORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTW ARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe.
iii iii iii iii iii Contents Notices ................................................................................................ vi Safety information ............................................................................. vii About this guide ............................................................................... viii P5LD2 Deluxe specifications summary ................................................ x Chapter 1: Chapter 1: Chapter 1: Chapter 1: Chapter 1: Product introduction Product introduction Product introduction Product introduction Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Life features ............................................. 1-5 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-6 Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Chapter 2: Hardware information Hardware information Hardware information Hardware information Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................ 2-2 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ................................................. 2-3 2.2.4 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-4 2.2.5 Layout contents ..................................................... 2-5 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-7 2.3.1 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-7 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan ...................... 2-10 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan .................. 2-12 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-14 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-14 2.4.2 Memory configurations ......................................... 2-14 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-17 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ................................................. 2-17 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-18 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-18 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card .............................. 2-18 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments .......................................... 2-19 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slots ........................................... 2-20 2.5.5 PCI slots ................................................................ 2-21 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 ...................................................... 2-21 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-22 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-23 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-23 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-25
iv iv iv iv iv Contents Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Powering up Powering up Powering up Powering up Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .................... 3-2 Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: BIOS setup BIOS setup BIOS setup BIOS setup BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.4 ASUS EZ Flash utility .............................................. 4-7 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-8 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-11 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-12 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-12 4.2.3 Navigation keys .................................................... 4-12 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-13 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ................................................... 4-13 4.2.6 Configuration fields .............................................. 4-13 4.2.7 Pop-up window ..................................................... 4-13 4.2.8 Scroll bar .............................................................. 4-13 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-13 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-14 4.3.1 System Time ......................................................... 4-14 4.3.2 System Date ......................................................... 4-14 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ................................................ 4-14 4.3.4 Language .............................................................. 4-14 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ......... 4-15 4.3.6 IDE Configuration .................................................. 4-16 4.3.7 System Information .............................................. 4-18 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-19 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration .................................... 4-19 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ................................................. 4-23 4.4.3 USB Configuration ................................................. 4-24 4.4.4 CPU Configuration ................................................. 4-25 4.4.5 Chipset ................................................................. 4-27 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration ............................ 4-29 4.4.7 PCI PnP ................................................................. 4-31
v v v v v Contents 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-33 4.5.1 Suspend Mode ...................................................... 4-33 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ................................ 4-33 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .................................................. 4-33 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ................................................ 4-33 4.5.5 APM Configuration ................................................ 4-34 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ................................................. 4-36 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-38 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-38 4.6.2 Hard Disk Drives ................................................... 4-38 4.6.3 Boot Settings Configuration ................................. 4-39 4.6.4 Security ................................................................ 4-40 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-43 Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Software support Software support Software support Software support Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ......................................... 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu .......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .......................................................... 5-4 5.2.4 Manuals menu ......................................................... 5-5 5.2.5 ASUS Contact information ...................................... 5-6 5.2.6 Other information ................................................... 5-6 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-9 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠.................................................... 5-9 5.3.2 AI NET 2 ............................................................... 5-11 5.3.3 Audio configurations ............................................ 5-12 5.5 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-17 5.5.1 Installing hard disks .............................................. 5-18 5.5.2 Intel î RAID configurations .................................... 5-19 5.5.3 Silicon Image RAID configurations ........................ 5-29 5.6 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-39 Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: CPU features CPU features CPU features CPU features CPU features A.1 Intel î EM64T ........................................................................ A-1 Using the Intel î EM64T feature ............................................ A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.2.1 System requirements ............................................. A-1 A.2.2 Using the EIST ........................................................ A-2 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3 Using the Hyper-Threading Technology ............................... A-3
vi vi vi vi vi Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâÂÂs authority to operate this equipment.
vii vii vii vii vii Safety information Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer.
viii viii viii viii viii About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and configuring the motherboard. How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized This guide contains the following parts: ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features that the motherboard supports. Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty flyers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
ix ix ix ix ix Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography Typography Typography Typography Typography Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select. Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase. <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key. Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key. <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ). Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets. Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[filename] afudos /iP5LD2E.ROM DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.
x x x x x P5LD2 Deluxe specifications summary (continued on the next page) CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage AI Audio AI Audio AI Audio AI Audio AI Audio IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 LGA775 socket for Intel î Pentium î D/Intel î Pentium î 4 or Intel î Celeron î processors Compatible with Intel î PCG 05B/05A and 04B/04A processors Supports Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 Technology (EM64T) Supports Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) Supports Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology Northbridge: Intel î 945P Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel î ICH7R 1066/800/533 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 240-pin DIMM sockets support unbufferred non-ECC DDR2-667 (FSB 1066/800), DDR2-533 (FSB 1066/800/533), or DDR2-400 (FSB 800/533) memory modules Supports up to 4 GB system memory 1 x PCI Express x16 slot for discrete graphics card 1 x Universal PCI Express⢠x16 slot (at x4 mode) 1 x PCI Express x1 slots 3 x PCI slots Intel î ICH7R SouthBridge supports: - 1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 hard disk - 4 x Serial ATA 3Gb/s with Intelî Matrix Storage Technology including RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 configuration Silicon Image 3132 SATA controller supports: - 1 x Internal Serial ATA 3Gb/s hard disk drive - 1 x External Serial ATA 3Gb/s SATA On-The-Go - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10*, RAID 5* and CONCATENATION* ( * Setup with a Serial ATA port multiplier ) ITE 8211F IDE controller supports: - 2 x UltraDMA 133/100/66 hard disks Realtek î ALC882M High-Definition Audio 8-CH CODEC 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF out port 1 x Optical S/PDIF out port Supports Universal Audio Jack (UAJ î ) Technology Supports Audio Sensing and Enumeration Technology Features the Dolby î Master Studio TI 1394a controller supports: - 1 x Internal IEEE 1394a connector - 1 x IEEE 1394a connector at the rear panel
xi xi xi xi xi Supports up to 10 USB 2.0 ports Marvell î 88E8053 PCI Express⢠Gigabit LAN controller Supports AI NET 2 CPU Lock Free ASUS AI Overclocking (Intelligent Frequency Tuner) ASUS NOS (Non-delay Overclocking System) ASUS PEG Link for single/dual graphics cards ASUS HyperPath 3 Precision Tweaker supports: - DIMM voltage: 8-step DRAM voltage control - Core voltage: Adjustable CPU voltage at 0.0125 V - PCI Express Frequency: Allows 1MHz increment from 100MHz to 200MHz - Stepless Frequency Selection(SFS) allows 1MHz increment from 100MHz to 400 MHz ASUS C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) Adjustable FSB/DDR2 frequencies with fixed PCI/PCI-E frequencies WiFi-TV PCI card (optional) supports: - Digital TV (DVB-T only), Analog TV, FM - WiFi@Home 802.11 a/b/g Stack Cool 2 SATA On-The-Go AI Quiet ASUS SATA On-The-Go ASUS EZ Plug ASUS AI Q-Fan ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS MyLogo2 ASUS EZ Flash 1 x Parallel port 1 x IEEE 1394a port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 4 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x External SATA port (SATA On-The-Go) 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 1 x PS/2 mouse port (green) 8-channel audio ports P5LD2 Deluxe specifications summary (continued on the next page) USB USB USB USB USB LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking features features features features features ASUS AI Life ASUS AI Life ASUS AI Life ASUS AI Life ASUS AI Life Special features Special features Special features Special features Special features Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel
xii xii xii xii xii P5LD2 Deluxe specifications summary BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal connectors connectors connectors connectors connectors Power Power Power Power Power Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD contents contents contents contents contents 8 MB Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP, DMI2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, WfM2.0 1 x Floppy disk drive connector 1 x Primary IDE connector 2 x IDE connectors 5 x Serial ATA RAID connectors 1 x CPU fan connector 1 x Power fan connector 2 x Chassis fan connectors 1 x Serial port connector (COM port) 1 x 24-pin ATX power connector 1 x 8-pin ATX 12 V power connector 1 x 4-pin ASUS EZ Plug⢠connector 2 x USB connectors for 4 additional USB 2.0 ports 1 x Optical drive audio connector 1 x IEEE 1394a connector 1 x GAME/MIDI connector 1 x Chassis intrusion connector 1 x Front panel High-Definition audio connector System panel connector ATX power supply (with 24-pin and 8-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12 V 2.0 compliant ASUS EZ Plug* ( *When using two graphics cards and a 20-pin ATX PSU ) ATX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in (30.5 cm x 24.4 cm) Device drivers ASUS PC Probe II ASUS Update ASUS AI Booster Microsoft î DirectX 9.0c Anti-Virus Utility (OEM version) WinDVD Suite (OEM version) Adobe Acrobat Reader ASUS Screensaver *Specifications are subject to change without notice.
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 1 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS î î î î î P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe motherboard I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules IEEE1394 1-port module Serial (COM2) port module USB 2.0 (2 ports) and GAME (1 port) module Cables Cables Cables Cables Cables 5 x Serial ATA signal cables 2 x Serial ATA power cables (dual plugs) 1 x Serial ATA power cable (single plug) 2 x Ultra DMA/133 cables 40-conductor IDE cable Floppy disk drive cable Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories I/O shield Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs ASUS motherboard support CD InterVideo î WinDVD Suite î ( OEM version) Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation User guide If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology The motherboard comes with a 775-pin surface mount Land Grid Array (LGA) socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î D, Intel î Pentium î 4 or Intel î Celeron î processor in the 775-land package. The motherboard supports the Intel î Pentium î 4 or Intel î Pentium î D processor with 1066/800/533 MHz Front Side Bus (FSB). The motherboard also supports the Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology and is fully compatible with Intel î 04B/04A and 05B/05A processors. See page 2-7 for details. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î 945P chipset 945P chipset 945P chipset 945P chipset 945P chipset The Intel î 945P chipset is the latest and one of the most powerful chipsets in personal computing. It supports 1066MHz Front Side Bus (FSB), PCI Express technology, dual-channel DDR2 memory, and IntelâÂÂs 800 MHz series Dual-Core⢠technology processors for lightning speed multi-tasking. Combined with the Intel î ICH7R that supports four Serial ATA II ports with Intel î Matrix Technology including RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 making it an excellent foundation for a powerful desktop computer. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î EM64T EM64T EM64T EM64T EM64T The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î D or Intel î Pentium î 4 processors with the Intel î EM64T (Extended Memory 64 Technology). The Intel î EM64T feature allows your computer to run on 64-bit operating systems and access larger amounts of system memory for faster and more efficient computing. See the Appendix for details. Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) Technology (EIST) Technology (EIST) Technology (EIST) Technology (EIST) The Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) intelligently manages the CPU resources by automatically adjusting the CPU voltage and core frequency depending on the CPU loading and system speed or power requirement. See page 4-26 and the Appendix for details. DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support DDR2 memory support The motherboard supports DDR2 memory which features data transfer rates o f 667 MHz (FSB 1066/800), 533 MHz (FSB 1066/800/533) or 400 MHz (FSB 800/533) to meet the higher bandwidth requirements of the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. The dual-channel DDR2 architecture doubles the bandwidth of your system memory to boost system performance, eliminating bottlenecks with peak bandwidths of up to 8.5 GB/s. See pages 2-14 to 2-17 for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface The motherboard fully supports PCI Express, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI specifications. See page 2-2 0 for details. Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) Universal PCI Express⢠slot (x4 mode) The Universal PCI Express slot allows users to set up a dual graphics card platform on a single motherboard. The ASUS Smart Switch detects PCI Express devices installed, and intelligently reroutes the PCI Express lanes to optimize bandwidth allocation. See page 2-20 for details. Dual RAID solution Dual RAID solution Dual RAID solution Dual RAID solution Dual RAID solution Onboard RAID controllers provide the motherboard with dual-RAID functionality that allows you to select the best RAID solution using IDE or Serial ATA devices. The Intel î ICH7R allows RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10 configuration for four SATA connectors and supports the Intel î Matrix Storage Technology. See pages 2-27 and 5-19 for details. The Silicon Image î 3132 Serial ATA controller supports two additional Serial ATA connectors for RAID 0, RAID 1 and JBOD functionality. You can also configure a RAID 10, RAID 5 and CONCATENATION sets using a Serial ATA port multiplier. See pages 2-23, 2-24, 2-28 and 5-29 for details.
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Theatre-level audio Theatre-level audio Theatre-level audio Theatre-level audio Theatre-level audio (designed for Dolby (designed for Dolby (designed for Dolby (designed for Dolby (designed for Dolby î î î î î Master Studio) Master Studio) Master Studio) Master Studio) Master Studio) This motherboard offers theatre-level 7.1 surround sound and audio specifications higher than that of DVD. Enjoy true home theatre experience with the following advanced sound technologies: Dolby Prologic IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker, and Dolby Digital Live. See pages 2-23 and 5-12 for details. S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready The motherboard supports the S/PDIF technology through the S/PDIF interfaces on the rear panel and at midboard. The S/PDIF technology turns your computer into a high-end entertainment system with digital connectivity to powerful audio and speaker systems. See page 2-24 for details. IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support IEEE 1394a support The IEEE 1394a interface provides high-speed and flexible PC connectivity to a wide range of peripherals and devices compliant to the IEEE 1394a standard. The IEEE 1394a interface allows up to 400 Mbps transfer rates through simple, low-cost, high-bandwidth asynchronous (real-time) data interfacing between computers, peripherals, and consumer electronic devices such as camcorders, VCRs, printers, TVs, and digital cameras. See pages 2-23 for details. USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 specification, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See page 2-24 for details. Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the ASIC (integrated in the Winbond Super I/O) to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The ASIC monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components. See page 4-36 for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 ASUS AI Life features ASUS AI Life features ASUS AI Life features ASUS AI Life features ASUS AI Life features AI Quiet AI Quiet AI Quiet AI Quiet AI Quiet The ASUS AI Quiet function dynamically controls CPU speed and reduces temperature and fan speeds, thus minimizing noise and ensuring quiet operation. ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 Stack Cool 2 is a fan-less and zero-noise cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components by 20 ð C. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat that critical components generate. See page 2-3 for details. WiFi-TV Card (optional) WiFi-TV Card (optional) WiFi-TV Card (optional) WiFi-TV Card (optional) WiFi-TV Card (optional) ASUS WiFi-TV card complies with the IEEE 802.11 a/b/g wireless LAN adapter that allows data transmission of up to 54 Mbps using the 2.4 GHz frequency band. ASUS provides full software application support and a user-friendly wizard to help you set up your wireless local area network effortlessly. You can share photos, videos, and MP3 files with other wireless devices without tangling cables and wires. The ASUS WiFi-TV card also offers digital TV (for DVB-T only) connection, which presents higher TV resolution and more functions compared to the traditional analog TV standard. This multi-functional card also supports FM radio. Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go Serial ATA II and SATA-on-the-Go The motherboard supports the Serial ATA 3 Gb/s technology through the Serial ATA interfaces and the Intel î 945P MCH chipset. The Serial ATA 3 Gb/s specification provides twice the bandwidth of the current Serial ATA products with a host of new features, including Native Command Queuing (NCQ), Power Management (PM) Implementation Algorithm, and Hot Swap. Serial ATA allows thinner, more flexible cables with lower pin count and reduced voltage requirements. Leveraging these Serial ATA II features is the Serial ATA on the Go. This external port on the rear panel I/O provides smart setup, hot-plug and support for up to 16 devices with port-multiplier functions. See pages 2-23 and 2-28 for details.
1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(NOS) is a technology that auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed only when needed. See page 4-19 for details. PEG Link Mode PEG Link Mode PEG Link Mode PEG Link Mode PEG Link Mode This feature enhances your PCI Express graphics card performance. It allows the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system configuration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PEG Link Mode. AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET2 is a BIOS-based diagnostic tool that detects and reports Ethernet cable faults and shorts. With this utility, you can easily monitor the condition of the Ethernet cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. During the bootup process, AI NET2 immediately diagnoses the LAN cable and reports shorts and faults up to 100 meters at 1 meter accuracy. See pages 4-23 and 5-11 for details. CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 This feature allows you to restore the original BIOS data from the support CD in case when the BIOS codes and data are corrupted. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. See page 4-5 for details. AI Q-Fan AI Q-Fan AI Q-Fan AI Q-Fan AI Q-Fan The ASUS AI Q-Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efficient operation. See pages 4- 36 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow easier and faster configuration. See page 4-14 for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠This new feature present in the motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See page 5-9 for details. ASUS HyperPath 3 technology ASUS HyperPath 3 technology ASUS HyperPath 3 technology ASUS HyperPath 3 technology ASUS HyperPath 3 technology The ASUS Hyper Path 3 technology optimizes the full potential of the Intel î chipset by shortening the latency time between the CPU and the system memory. Enabling Hyper Path 3 on system improves memory performance without affecting system stability. See page 4-27 for details. Fanless Design Fanless Design Fanless Design Fanless Design Fanless Design The ASUS fanless design allows multi-directional heat flow from major thermal sources in the motherboard to lower overall system temperature.
1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 2 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-7 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-14 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-18 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-22 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-23
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED. The green LED lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft- off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or to a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity. ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standby Power OFF Powere d Off
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information P5LD2 DELUXE î 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the configuration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard fits into it. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 ASUS Stack Cool 2 The motherboard comes with the ASUS Stack Cool 2 cooling solution that lowers the temperature of critical heat generating components by 20úC. The motherboard uses a special design on the printed circuit board (PCB) to dissipate heat that critical components generate.
2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout P ANEL P5LD2 DELUXE R AAFP GAME CHASSIS 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) CPU_F AN DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) CHA1_F AN2 IE_1394_2 FLOPPY Super I/O 8Mb BIOS TSB43AB22A PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Ke yboard P ARALLEL PORT SPDIF_O SPDIF_O2 CD EZ_PLUG ALC882M PCIEX16_1 PCIEX1_1 PCIEX16_2 PCI1 CLRTC USB78 USB56 S ATA 2 S ATA 1 S ATA 3 S ATA 4 SA T A_RAID2 PWR_F AN EX_SA T A1 Intel ICH7R SB_PWR EA TXPWR PRI_IDE CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CHA_F AN1 LGA775 Intel MCH 945P Marvell 88E8053 SA T A Link PCI2 PCI3 AUDIO PRI_EIDE SEC_EIDE ITE IT821 1F COM1 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: LAN port EA TX12V
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 2.2.5 Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots Page Page Page Page Page 1. DDR2 DIMM slots 2-14 2. PCI Express x16 slot 2-19 3. PCI Express U-slot (at PCI Express x4 bandwidth) 2-19 4. PCI slots 2-20 5. PCI Express x1 slot 2-20 Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Page Page Page Page Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC) 2-22 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. PS/2 mouse port (green) 2-23 2. Parallel port 2-23 3. IEEE 1394a port 2-23 4. LAN (RJ-45) port 2-23 5. Side Speaker Out port (black) 2-23 6. Center/Subwoofer port (orange) 2-23 7. Line In port (light blue) 2-23 8. Line Out port (lime) 2-23 9. Microphone port (pink) 2-24 10. Rear Speaker Out port (gray) 2-24 11. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 2-24 12. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-24 13. External SATA port 2-24 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port 2-24 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 2-24 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 2-24
2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-25 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) 2-25 3. ITE IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], SEC_EIDE [red]) 2-26 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) 2-27 5. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID2) 2-28 6. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-29 7. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-29 8. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) 2-30 9. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) 2-30 10. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) 2-31 11. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1,PWR_FAN1, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) 2-31 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) 2-32 13. IEEE 1394a port connectors (10-1 pin IE1394 _2 ) 2-32 14. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, 8-pin EATX12V, 4-pin EZ_PLUG) 2-33 15. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) 2-34 System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) System warnsing speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) ATX power button/soft-off button (Light Green 2-pin PWRSW) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET)
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU To install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î D, Intel î Pentium î 4, and Intel î Celeron î processors in the 775-land package. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the cam box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. ⢠Your boxed Intel î LGA775 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU, fan and heatsink assembly. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter. ⢠Upon purchase of the motherboard, make sure that the PnP cap is on the socket and the socket pins are not bent. Contact your retailer immediately if the PnP cap is missing, or if you see any damage to the PnP cap/socket pins/motherboard components. ASUS will shoulder the cost of repair only if the damage is shipment/ transit-related. ⢠Keep the cap after installing the motherboard. ASUS will process Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) requests only if the motherboard comes with the cap on the LGA775 socket. ⢠The product warranty does not cover damage to the socket pins resulting from incorrect CPU installation/removal, or misplacement/ loss/incorrect removal of the PnP cap. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE CPU Socket 775
2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and forefinger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should fit into the CPU notch. Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Alignment key Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Gold triangle mark Load plate Load plate Load plate Load plate Load plate A B 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Retention tab Load lever Load lever Load lever Load lever Load lever This side of the This side of the This side of the This side of the This side of the socket box should socket box should socket box should socket box should socket box should face you. face you. face you. face you. face you. PnP cap PnP cap PnP cap PnP cap PnP cap A B To prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 The CPU fits in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU! 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 Technology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading Technology. Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features.
2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Fastener Fastener Fastener Fastener Fastener Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole Motherboard hole 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan Installing the CPU heatsink and fan The Intel î processor in the 775-land package requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. To install the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four fasteners match the holes on the motherboard. Narrow end Narrow end Narrow end Narrow end Narrow end of the groove of the groove of the groove of the groove of the groove ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î processor, the package includes the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. If you buy a CPU separately, make sure that you use only Intel î -certified multi-directional heatsink and fan. ⢠Your Intel î processor heatsink and fan assembly comes in a push-pin design and requires no tool to install. ⢠If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly, make sure that you have properly applied Thermal Interface Material to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly. Make sure that you have installed the motherboard to the chassis before you install the CPU fan and heatsink assembly. Make sure to orient each fastener with the narrow end of the groove pointing outward. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Orient the heatsink and fan assembly such that the CPU fan cable is closest to the CPU fan connector.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN. 2. Push down two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to secure the heatsink and fan assembly in place. B B A A A A B B Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE CPU fan connector CPU_F AN GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM
2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan Uninstalling the CPU heatsink and fan To uninstall the CPU heatsink and fan: 1. Disconnect the CPU fan cable from the connector on the motherboard. 2. Rotate each fastener counterclockwise. 3. Pull up two fasteners at a time in a diagonal sequence to disengage the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard. B B A A A A B B 4. Carefully remove the heatsink and fan assembly from the motherboard.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 5. Rotate each fastener clockwise to ensure correct orientation when reinstalling. The narrow end of the groove should point outward after resetting. (The photo shows the groove shaded for emphasis.) Narrow end of the groove Narrow end of the groove Narrow end of the groove Narrow end of the groove Narrow end of the groove Refer to the documentation in the boxed or stand-alone CPU fan package for detailed information on CPU fan installation.
2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. A DDR2 module has the same physical dimensions as a DDR DIMM but has a 240-pin footprint compared to the 184-pin DDR DIMM. DDR2 DIMMs are notched differently to prevent installation on a DDR DIMM socket. The figure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations Memory configurations You may install 256 MB, 512 MB and 1 GB unbuffered non-ECC DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠For dual-channel configuration, the total size of memory module(s) installed per channel must be the same (DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 = DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2). ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. Refer to the DDR2 Qualified Vendors List on the next page for details. ⢠Due to chipset resource allocation, the system may detect less than 4 GB system memory when you installed four 1 GB DDR2 memory modules. ⢠This motherboard does not support memory modules made up of 128 Mb chips or double sided x16 memory modules. Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Channel A Channel A Channel A Channel A Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel B Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE 240-pin DDR DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) Qualified Vendors Lists (QVL) DDR2-667 DDR2-667 DDR2-667 DDR2-667 DDR2-667 Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) : SS SS SS SS S S - Single-sided DS DS DS DS D S - Double-sided DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support : A A A A A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory configuration. B B B B B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the yellow slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration. C C C C C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into the yellow and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-667 MHz (FSB 1066/800) QVL. 256MB SAMSUNG M378T3253FZ0-CE6 SAMSUNG SS K4T56083QF-ZCE6 ⢠⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M378T6453FZ0-CE6 SAMSUNG DS K4T56083QF-ZCE6 ⢠⢠⢠256MB Kingston HYB18T512800AF3S Kingston SS KVR667D2N5/512 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Kingston E5108AE-GE-E Kingston DS KVR667D2N5/1G ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U64AP8-Y5 Hynix SS HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U64AP8-Y5 Hynix DS HY5PS12821AFP-Y5 ⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U64AP8-Y4 Hynix DS HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U64AP8-Y4 Hynix SS HY5PS12821AFP-Y4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B4 MICRON DS 4VB41D9CZM ⢠⢠⢠1024MB MICRON MT16HTF12864AY-667A2 MICRON DS 4UAIID9CWX ⢠⢠256MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AY-667B5 MICRON SS 4SB42D9CZM ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B3 MICRON DS 4TB41D9CZM ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B3 MICRON DS 4UB41D9CZM ⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B3 MICRON DS 4SB41D9CZM ⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-667B3 MICRON DS 4SB42D9CZM ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64T64000HU-3S-A Infineon SS HYB18T512800AF3S ⢠⢠⢠256MB ELPIDA EBE25UC8ABFA-6E-E ELPIDA SS E2508AB-GE-E ⢠⢠⢠512MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8AEFA-6E-E ELPIDA SS E5108AE-GE-E ⢠⢠⢠1024MB ELPIDA EBE11UD8AEFA-6E-E N/A DS N/A ⢠⢠⢠Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Brand Brand Brand Brand Brand Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support
2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 512MB SAMSUNG M378T6553BG0-CD5 N/A SS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB SAMSUNG M378T2953BG0-CD5 N/A DS K4T51083QB-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG M378T3253FG0-CD5 N/A SS K4T56083QF-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M378T6453FG0-CD5 N/A DS K4T56083QF-GCD5 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB SAMSUNG M391T2953BG0-CD5 N/A DS K4T51083QB-GCD5(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M391T6453FG0-CD5 N/A DS K4T56083QF-GCD5(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS72T64000HU-3.7-A Infineon SS HYB18T512800AF3(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64T64000GU-3.7-A Infineon SS HYB18T512800AC37 ⢠⢠⢠256MB Infineon HYS64T32000HU-3.7-A Infineon SS HYB18T512160AF-3.7 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Infineon HYS64T128020HU-3.7-A Infineon DS HYB18T512800AF37 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64T64000HU-3.7-A Infineon SS HYB18T512800AF37 ⢠⢠⢠512MB CORSAIR CM2X512-4200 N/A DS N/A ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AG-53EB2 MICRON DS 4FBIID9BQM ⢠⢠⢠1024MB MICRON MT16HTF12864AY-53EA1 MICRON DS 4JAIID9CRZ ⢠⢠⢠256MB MICRON MT8HTF3264AY-53EB3 MICRON SS 4FBIID9CHM ⢠⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16HTF6464AY-53EB2 MICRON DS 4FBIID9CHM ⢠⢠⢠256MB MICRON N/A MICRON SS 4DBIIZ9BQT ⢠⢠⢠1024MB MICRON MT18HTF12872AY-53EA1 MICRON DS 4MAIID9CRZ(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠1024MB MICRON MT16HTF12864AY-53EA1 MICRON DS 4MAIID9CRZ ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/1G N/A DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠256MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/256 N/A SS HYB18T512160AC-3.7 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Kingston KVR533D2N4/512 ELPIDA SS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U648-C4 N/A SS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U728-C4 N/A SS HY5PS12821F-C4(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U728-C4 N/A DS HY5PS12821F-C4(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U648-C4 N/A DS HY5PS12821F-C4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMP564U728-C4 N/A SS HY5PS12821FP-C4(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U648-C4 N/A DS HY5PS12821FP-C4 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB Hynix HYMP512U728-C4 N/A DS HY5PS12821F-E3(ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB ELPIDA EBE51ED8ABFA-5C-E ELPIDA DS E5108AB-5C-E (ECC) ⢠⢠⢠512MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8ABFA-5C ELPIDA DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠512MB ELPIDA EBE51UD8ABFA-5C-E ELPIDA DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠1024MB ELPIDA EBE11UD8ABFA-5C-E ELPIDA DS E5108AB-5C-E ⢠⢠⢠Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Brand Brand Brand Brand Brand Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DDR2-533 DDR2-533 DDR2-533 DDR2-533 DDR2-533 Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) Side(s) : SS SS SS SS S S - Single-sided DS DS DS DS D S - Double-sided DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support : A A A A A - Supports one module inserted into either slot, in Single-channel memory configuration. B B B B B - Supports one pair of modules inserted into either the yellow slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration. C C C C C - Supports two pairs of modules inserted into the yellow and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR2-533 MHz (FSB 1066/800/ 533) QVL.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. To install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 1 Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3
2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press firmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, configure the it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conflicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function 0 1 System Timer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 4 12 Communications Port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7 15 Printer Port (LPT1)* 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 11 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C D D D D D E E E E E F F F F F G G G G G H H H H H PCI slot 1 â â â â â shared â â PCI slot 2 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 3 â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI Express x16 slot shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI Express x4 slot shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI Express x1 slot â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 1 â â â â shared â â â Onboard USB controller 2 â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 3 â â shared â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 4 â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB 2.0 controller â â â â shared â â â Onboard IDE port â â â â â â shared â Onboard SATA port â â â â â â â shared Onboard HD audio â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard LAN1 shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard PCIe SATA RAID â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂ
2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 PCI Express x16 slots PCI Express x16 slots PCI Express x16 slots PCI Express x16 slots PCI Express x16 slots This motherboard has two PCI Express x16 slots that support PCI Express x16 graphic cards complying with the PCI Express specifications. With two graphics cards installed, the motherboard can enable quad-display. Primary PCI Express x 16 Primary PCI Express x 16 Primary PCI Express x 16 Primary PCI Express x 16 Primary PCI Express x 16 slot for discrete graphics slot for discrete graphics slot for discrete graphics slot for discrete graphics slot for discrete graphics card (blue) card (blue) card (blue) card (blue) card (blue) Universal PCI Universal PCI Universal PCI Universal PCI Universal PCI Express slot Express slot Express slot Express slot Express slot [x4 mode] (black) [x4 mode] (black) [x4 mode] (black) [x4 mode] (black) [x4 mode] (black) We recommend that you install a VGA card on the primary (blue) PCI Express slot, and install any other PCI Express device on the Universal PCI Express slot (black). Primary PCI Express x16 Primary PCI Express x16 Primary PCI Express x16 Primary PCI Express x16 Primary PCI Express x16 slot slot slot slot slot The primary PCI Express x16 graphics card supports PCI Express x16 graphic cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. Universal PCI Express slot Universal PCI Express slot Universal PCI Express slot Universal PCI Express slot Universal PCI Express slot (x4 mode) (x4 mode) (x4 mode) (x4 mode) (x4 mode) This motherboard also supports a Universal PCI Express slot with a maximum speed of 2 GB/s. The operating frequency of this slot changes, depending on the type of PCI Express card you install. Refer to the table on the next page for details. The figure shows two graphics cards installed on the primary PCI Express x16 slot and the Universal PCI Express slot. If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labeled CHA_FAN1 for better thermal environment. See page 2-31 for the connector location.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 Options for Universal Options for Universal Options for Universal Options for Universal Options for Universal PCI Express operating speed PCI Express operating speed PCI Express operating speed PCI Express operating speed PCI Express operating speed PCI Express slot PCI Express slot PCI Express slot PCI Express slot PCI Express slot Auto Automatically optimizes performance and functionality according to devices installed x4 mode [Faster] User gets the best performance but this mode disables the PCI Express x1 slot x2 mode [Fast] Always runs at PCI Express x2 speed 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI specifications. The figure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. ⢠Some PCI Express graphics cards cannot operate on x4/x2 mode. We suggest that you install these cards on the primary PCI Express slot (blue) to increase system stability. ⢠Some PCI Express devices cannot operate on x4/x2 mode. We suggest that you install these devices on the PCI Express slot x1 slot. 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 PCI Express x1 PCI Express x1 PCI Express x1 PCI Express x1 This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The figure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot.
2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.6 Jumpers 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! You do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear CMOS (Default) 12 23
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. IEEE 1394a port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio configuration. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Center/Subwoofer port (orange). Center/Subwoofer port (orange). Center/Subwoofer port (orange). Center/Subwoofer port (orange). Center/Subwoofer port (orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). This port connects a tape, CD, DVD player, or other audio sources. 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker. In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel configuration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. Refer to the audio configuration table on the next page for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration. ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED LED LED LED LED LED ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK ACT/LINK LED LED LED LED LED 11 4 6 13 1 16 2 15 14 5 7 8 9 10 3 12
2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. External SATA port. External SATA port. External SATA port. External SATA port. External SATA port. This port connects to an external SATA box or a Serial ATA port multiplier that supports up to 16 devices and enables smart setup and hot-plug function. 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port . This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. 15. 15. 15. 15. 15. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 16. 16. 16. 16. 16. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the rear speakers on a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio configuration. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Pink Pink Pink Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Black Black Black Black Black â â â Side Speaker Out Orange Orange Orange Orange Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Port Port Port Port Port 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) (Headset) Refer to the audio configuration table below for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided floppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the floppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Floppy disk drive connector NOTE: Orient the red markings o n the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red marking s (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE
2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_EIDE [red], SEC_EIDE [red]) SEC_EIDE [red]) SEC_EIDE [red]) SEC_EIDE [red]) SEC_EIDE [red]) These connectors are for Ultra ATA 133/100/66 signal cables. The ITE IDE connectors support up to four IDE hard disk drives for easier data storage. P5LD2 DELUXE R P5LD2 DELUXE IDE connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_EIDE SEC_EIDE PIN 1 PIN 1 The connectors do not support ATAPI devices.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1 [red], SATA2 [red], SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) SATA3 [black], SATA4 [black]) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10 configuration with the Intel î Matrix Storage Technology through the onboard Intel î ICH7R RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial ATA RAID configurations. These connectors are set to Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE Standard IDE mode by default. In S S S S S tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE mode, you can connect Serial ATA boot/data hard disk drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial ATA RAID set using these connectors, set the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section âÂÂ4.3.6 IDE Configurationâ on page 4-16 for details. Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA ⢠You must install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later versions before using Serial ATA hard disk drives. The Serial ATA RAID feature (RAID 0/RAID 1) is available only if you are using Windows î 2000/XP. ⢠When using the connectors in S S S S S tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE tandard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SATA1 or SATA2 connector. Refer to the table on the next page for the recommended SATA hard disk drive connections. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE SA T A connectors S ATA 1 S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXP4 RSA T A_RXN4 GND GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXP3 RSA T A_RXN3 GND GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND S ATA 3 S ATA 4 Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Serial ATA hard disk drive connection Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Color Color Color Color Color Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Use Use Use Use Use SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 SATA1/SATA2 Red Red Red Red Red Master Master Master Master Master Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk Boot disk SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 SATA3/SATA4 Black Black Black Black Black Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Data disk Data disk Data disk Data disk Data disk
2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) Serial ATA RAID connector (7-pin SATA_RAID2) This connector is for a Serial ATA signal cable. It supports a Serial ATA hard disk drive that you can combine with an external Serial ATA 3Gb/ s device to configure a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set, through the onboard Silicon Image SATA RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up Serial ATA RAID configurations. The Silicon 3132 Controller item in the BIOS is set to [SATA2 Mode] by default, allowing you to enable the hot-plug function for the external device. Set to [RAID Mode] to use the connectors to build a RAID set. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE SA T A RAID connector SA T A_RAID 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Serial ATA hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Serial ATA signal cable and installed Serial ATA hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the Silicon Image RAID utility and SATA BIOS setup during POST. ⢠For details on the Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID configuration, refer to the âÂÂSil3132 UserâÂÂs Manualâ in your motherboard support CD. ⢠Use a Serial ATA port multiplier if you want to configure a RAID 5, RAID 10 or CONCATENATION set. ⢠Use an external SATA box to configure a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠The Serial ATA port multiplier and external SATA box are purchased separately. ⢠Make sure to install the Silicon Image SATA Link Sil 3132 driver and the Silicon Image RAID 5 Array Management Utility from the support CD before using RAID 5 configuration. Do not unplug the external Serial ATA drive when a RAID 0 or RAID 1 was configured.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy ACâÂÂ97 audio standard. It is recommended that you connect a high-definition front panel audio module to this connector to avail of the motherboardâÂÂs high-definition audio capability. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) This connector is for the 4-pin audio cable that connects to the audio connector at the back of the optical drive. Enable the CD-IN function in the audio utility when using this connector. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Internal audio connecto r CD (black) Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Analog front panel connector AC âÂÂ97 audio pin definitio n AAFP NC MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MICPWR NC AGND SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND
2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable t o the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) This connector is for a GAME/MIDI port. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The GAME/MIDI port connects a joystick or game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Game connector GAME 5V 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors CPU, Power, and Chassis fan connectors (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) (4-pin CPU_FAN, PWR_FAN, CHA_FAN1, CHA_FAN2) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350 mA ~ 2000 mA (24 W max.) or a total of 1 A ~ 3.48 A (4 1.7 6 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. ⢠Only the CPU_FAN and CHA_FAN1 connectors support the ASUS Q-Fan 2 feature. ⢠If you install two VGA cards, we recommend that you plug the rear chassis fan cable to the motherboard connector labeled CHA_FAN1 for better heat dissipation. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufficient air flow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE COM port connector PIN 1 COM1 P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotatio n 12V GND Rotatio n 12V CPU_F AN CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotatio n 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU F AN IN CPU F AN PWM
2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector. The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default ) Never connect a USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable t o the IEEE 1394 connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 15. 15. 15. 15. 15. IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_2) This connector is for an additional IEEE 1394 port. Connect the IEEE 1394 module cable (orange) to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE IEEE 1394 connector IE1394_2 1 GND 12V TPB1- GND TP A1- 12V TPB1 GND TP A1
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 2-33 2-33 2-33 2-33 2-33 16. 16. 16. 16. 16. ATX power connectors ATX power connectors ATX power connectors ATX power connectors ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, (24-pin EATXPWR, (24-pin EATXPWR, (24-pin EATXPWR, (24-pin EATXPWR, 8 8 8 8 8 -pin -pin -pin -pin -pin E E E E E ATX12V ATX12V ATX12V ATX12V ATX12V , 4-pin EZ_PLUG , 4-pin EZ_PLUG , 4-pin EZ_PLUG , 4-pin EZ_PLUG , 4-pin EZ_PLUG ) ) ) ) ) These connectors are for ATX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE A TX power connectors EA TXPWR EA TX12V EZ_PLUG 5V EZ_DET GND 12V 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olt s Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC ⢠You may use a 4-pin ATX12V power plug for this connector. ⢠Make sure to remove the cap on the connector before connecting an 8-pin EPS 12V power plug. ⢠Use only either a 4-pin ATX12V or an 8-pin EPS 12V power plug. Connecting other power plug types may serious damage to the system. Important notes on motherboard power requirements Important notes on motherboard power requirements Important notes on motherboard power requirements Important notes on motherboard power requirements Important notes on motherboard power requirements ⢠When installing two VGA cards using a 20-pin ATX PSU with 12V capability, we recommend that you connect the EZ Plug for sufficient power. Refer to the PSU documentation for dual VGA power requirements. ⢠For a fully configured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with ATX 12 V Specification 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 350 W. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 8-pin/4-pin ATX12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when configuring a system with more power consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. EA TX12V Connect a Connect a Connect a Connect a Connect a 4-pin power 4-pin power 4-pin power 4-pin power 4-pin power plug here plug here plug here plug here plug here Remove the cap Remove the cap Remove the cap Remove the cap Remove the cap before using an before using an before using an before using an before using an 8-pin power plug 8-pin power plug 8-pin power plug 8-pin power plug 8-pin power plug
2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity LED (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or flashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠ATX power button/soft-off button ATX power button/soft-off button ATX power button/soft-off button ATX power button/soft-off button ATX power button/soft-off button (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) (Light green 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. 17. 17. 17. 17. 17. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. The sytem panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. Refer to the connector description below for details. P5LD2 DELUXE î P5LD2 DELUXE System panel connector * Requires an A TX power supply . P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker Ground RESET Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED PLED SPEAKER
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 3 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the first time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST. While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Error Error Error Error Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4.
3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Powering off the computer 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows î 2000: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then click Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK OK OK OK O K button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î XP: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then select Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 4 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-11 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-14 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-19 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-33 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-38 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-43
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable floppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable floppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS file fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a floppy disk or the motherboard support CD.) 4. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. b. Click Start Start Start Start Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My My My My My Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File File File File File from the menu, then select Format Format Format Format Format . A Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk window appears. e. Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows î î î î î XP users: XP users: XP users: XP users: XP users: Select Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup Create an MS-DOS startup disk disk disk disk disk from the format options field, then click Start Start Start Start Start . Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS file in DOS environment using a bootable floppy disk with the updated BIOS file. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS file that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS To copy the current BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: Windows î 2000 environment To create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start Start Start Start Start , then select Run Run Run Run Run . d. In the Open Open Open Open Open field, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D is your optical drive letter. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS file to the bootable floppy disk. Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[filename] where the [filename] is any user-assigned filename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main filename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.ROM ⢠Make sure that the floppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1.2 MB free space to save the file. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS file. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS file to the floppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... done Write to file...... ok A:\> 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[filename] where [filename] is the latest or the original BIOS file on the bootable floppy disk. Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file To update the BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard. Save the BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5LD2E.ROM Write the BIOS filename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS filename at the DOS prompt.
4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5LD2E.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during flash BIOS Reading file ....... done Reading flash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing flash ...... done Writing flash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility verifies the file and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! A:\>afudos /iP5LD2E.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.19(ASUS V2.07(03.11.24BB)) Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during flash BIOS Reading file ....... done Reading flash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing flash ...... done Writing flash ...... done Verifying flash .... done Please restart your computer A:\>
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS file when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS file using the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk that contains the updated BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk To recover the BIOS from a floppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the floppy disk with the original or updated BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âÂÂP5LD2E.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start flashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS file and starts flashing the corrupted BIOS file. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS file in the floppy disk to P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM .
4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading file âÂÂP5LD2E.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start flashing... When no floppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS file. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy...
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a floppy disk and using a DOS-based utility. The EZ Flash utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self Tests (POST). To update the BIOS using EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard and rename the same to P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM P5LD2E.ROM . 2. Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk, then restart the system. 3. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. When the correct BIOS file is found, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âÂÂP5LD2E.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start erasing.......| Start programming...| Flashed successfully. Rebooting. ⢠Do not shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! ⢠A âÂÂFloppy not found!â error message appears if there is no floppy disk in the drive. A âÂÂP5LD2E.ROM not found!â error message appears if the correct BIOS file is not found in the floppy disk. Make sure that you rename the BIOS file to P5LD2E.ROM.
4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX . See page 5-4 for the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities screen menu. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or click Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select . Click Next Next Next Next Next . Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . T h e ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next .
4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file To update the BIOS through a BIOS file: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a file file file file file option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS file from the Open Open Open Open Open window, then click Save Save Save Save Save . 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable firmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the firmware hub. The firmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Load Load Load Load Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ4.7 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for this motherboard.
4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main Main Main Main Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power Power Power Power Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot Boot Boot Boot Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys General help General help General help General help General help Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main Main Main Main Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- configurable, you can change the value of the field opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a field, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not fit on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 General help General help General help General help General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4] Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window
4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main Main Main Main Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. Configuration options: [English] [Français] [Deutsch] [Japanese] [Chinese (GB)] [Chinese BIG5] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit System Time [11:51:19] System Date [Thu 05/07/2004] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master : [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave : [ASUS CD-S520/A] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave The BIOS automatically detects the connected IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item, then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-configurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are specifically configuring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Configuration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Select the type of device connected to the system. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled]
4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the configurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to configure the item. Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Sets the configuration for the Serial ATA connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial ATA features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, or the Intel î Matrix Storage Technology configuration from the Serial ATA hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. If you want to use the Serial ATA hard disk drives as Parallel ATA physical storage devices, set this item to [Standard IDE]. If you want the Serial ATA hard disk drives to use the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), set this item to [AHCI]. For details on AHCI, go to: www.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012304.htm www.intel.com/support/chipsets/imst/sb/CS-012305.htm The SATA controller is set to Native mode when this item is set to [RAID] or [AHCI]. IDE Configuration Configure SATA As [Standard IDE] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] When in AHCI/RAID mode SATA controller is forced to Native mode.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Disables or allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the installed operating system (OS). Set to [Enhanced Mode] if you are using native OS including Windows î 2000/XP. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] Allows you to use native OS on Serial ATA and Parallel ATA ports. It is recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility. In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel ATA ports only if you do not install any Serial ATA device. The P-ATA S-ATA and P-ATA options are for advanced users only. If you set to any of these options and encountered problems, revert to the default setting S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA . Configuration options: [S-ATA P-ATA] [S-ATA] [P-ATA] The Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode Onboard IDE Operate Mode and its sub-menu items appear only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [Standard IDE]. Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM [Disabled] Enables or disables the onboard Serial ATA boot ROM. This item appears only when the Configure SATA As item is set as RAID. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM appears only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [RAID]. ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] ALPE and ASP [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Agressive Link Power Management (ALPE) and Aggressive Slumber/Partial (ASP) management features. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] AHCI Port 3 Interlock Switch [Disabled] Enables or disables the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI) Port 3 interlock switch. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP ALPE and ASP and its sub-menu items appear only when the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item is set to [AHCI]. IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Configuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35]
4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 System Information System Information System Information System Information System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system specifications. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU specification System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AMIBIOS Version : 0118 Build Date : 04/19/05 Processor Type : Genuine Intel(R) CPU 2.80GHz Speed : 2800 MHz Count : 2 System Memory Size : 1024MB Appropriated : 0MB Available : 1024MB
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. JumperFree Configuration LAN Cable Status USB Configuration CPU Configuration Chipset Onboard Devices Configuration PCIPnP 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] Allows you to select the overclocking options to achieve the desired CPU internal frequency. Select either one of the preset overclocking configiuration options. Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Loads the optimal settings for the system. Extreme Extreme Extreme Extreme Extreme Loads the standard settings for the system. AI Overclock AI Overclock AI Overclock AI Overclock AI Overclock Loads overclocking profiles with optimal parameters for stability when overclocking. AI N.O.S. AI N.O.S. AI N.O.S. AI N.O.S. AI N.O.S. The ASUS AI Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boost the performance for the most demanding tasks. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Adjust system frequency/voltage. Configure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclocking [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto]
4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency FSB 1066 266 MHz FSB 800 200 MHz FSB 533 133 MHz DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR2 operating frequency. Configuration options: [Auto] [DDR2-400MHz] [DDR2-533MHz] [DDR2-600MHz] [DDR-667MHz] Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. The following item appears only when you set the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item to [Manual]. CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] CPU Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > < > < > < > < > and <-> <-> <-> <-> < - > keys to adjust the CPU frequency. You can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 100 to 450. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency. This item is set to [Auto] by default. Configuration options: [Auto] [90]...[150] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] Allows you to synchronize the PCI frequency with the PCI Express or CPU frequency. Configuration options: [To CPU] [33.33MHz] [ Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Allows enhanced system performance. Setting to [Turbo] may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto]. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Turbo]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 The following items also appear when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [Manual] or [AI NOS]. Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the DDR2 reference voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.80V] [1.90V] [1.95V] [2.00V] [2.10V] [2.15V] [2.20V] [2.30V] Refer to the DDR2 documentation before adjusting the memory voltage. Setting a very high memory voltage may damage the memory module(s)! CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] Sets the operating VCore voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.7000V] [1.6875V] [1.6750V] [1.6625V] [1.6500V] [1.6375V] [1.6250V] [1.6125V] [1.6000V] [1.5875V] [1.5750V] [1.5625V] [1.5500V] [1.5375V] [1.5250V] [1.5125V] [1.5000V] [1.4875V] [1.4750V] [1.4625V] [1.4500V] [1.4375V] [1.4250V] [1.4125V] [1.4000V] [1.3875V] [1.3750V] [1.3625V] [1.3500V] [1.3375V] [1.3250V] [1.3125V] [1.3000V] [1.2875V] [1.2750V] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the front side bus termination voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.20V] [1.30V] [1.40V] [1.50V] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] MCH Chipset Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the memory controller hub (MCH) voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.50V] [1.55V] [1.60V] [1.65V] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] ICH Chipset Voltage [Auto] Allows you to select the I/O controller hub (ICH) voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.05V] [1.20V] Setting to a very high CPU VCore voltage can damage the CPU or may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to default settings.
4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [AI NOS]. N.O.S. Mode [Auto] Sets the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode. Select either of the following configuration options: [Auto] [Manual] Sensitivity [Sensitive] Sets the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode sensitivity. Select either of the following configuration options: Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal - activates overclocking on a threshold between light and heavy CPU loading. Sensitive Sensitive Sensitive Sensitive Sensitive - activates overclocking on a light CPU loading. Less-Sensitive Less-Sensitive Less-Sensitive Less-Sensitive Less-Sensitive - activates overclocking on a heavy CPU loading. Target Frequency [Overclock 3%] Allows you to set the target frequency. Configuration options: [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking AI Overclocking item is set to [Overclock Profile]. Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Allows you to overclock the CPU speed through the available preset values. Configuration options: [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] [FSB888/DDR2-667] [FSB960/DDR2-800] [FSB1280/DDR2-800] [FSB1333/DDR2-667] [FSB1333/DDR2-834]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status This menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cable connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port. POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable LAN cable check during POST. When enabled, the menu reports the cable faults or shorts, and displays the point (length) where the fault or short is detected. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] POST Check LAN Cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 Open 0.0M 3-6 Open 0.0M 4-5 Open 0.0M 7-8 Open 0.0M Check LAN cable during POST.
4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] Enables or disables the USB function. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). Configuration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] Allows you to enable support for operating systems without an EHCI hand-off feature. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] The Module Version Module Version Module Version Module Version Module Version and USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None None None None None . USB Configuration Module Version - 2.24.0-F.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-Off [Disabled] Enables USB host controllers.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 14] Sets the ratio between the CPU core clock and the Front Side Bus frequency. The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. Configuration options: [ 8]...[28] You can only adjust the Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS Ratio CMOS i f you installed an unlocked CPU. Refer to the CPU documentation for details. VID CMOS Setting [ 62] VID CMOS Setting [ 62] VID CMOS Setting [ 62] VID CMOS Setting [ 62] VID CMOS Setting [ 62] Allows you to set the VID CMOS setting at which the processor is to run. The BIOS auto-detects the default value of this item. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. The following item appears only when you install a CPU that supports the lock free feature. Only some latest CPUs support this feature. CPU Lock Free [Auto] CPU Lock Free [Auto] CPU Lock Free [Auto] CPU Lock Free [Auto] CPU Lock Free [Auto] Allows you to adjust the CPU multiplier to 14x. Setting this item to [Auto] allows the motherboard to automatically reduce the CPU multiplier value for more flexibility when increasing the external FSB. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the microcode updation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Configure Advanced CPU settings Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 2800 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 16 KB Cache L2 : 1024 KB Cache L3 : 0 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked (Max:14, Min:14) Ratio Actual Value : 14 Ratio CMOS Setting: [ 14] VID CMOS Setting: [ 62] CPU Lock Free [Auto] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ.
4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] When set to [Auto], the BIOS automatically checks the CPUâÂÂs capability to enable the C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU power consumption is lower when idle. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the CPU Internal Thermal Control function. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Scroll down the screen to display the following items. Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading Technology. Refer to the Appendix for more information on the Hyper-Threading Technology. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears only when you installed an Intel î Pentium î D or Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST). Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology [Automatic] Allows you to use the Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology. When set to [Automatic], you can adjust the system power settings in the operating system to use the EIST feature. Set this item to [Maximum] or [Disabled] i f you do not want to use the EIST. The CPU constantly operates at a lower internal frequency when you set this item t o [Minimum]. Configuration options: [Maximum] [Minimum] [Automatic] [Disabled] ⢠Refer to the Appendix for details on how to use the EIST feature. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS file that supports EIST.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [5 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [6 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [6 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [6 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge Delay [15 Clocks] Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] ~ [18 Clocks] DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] [6 Clocks] 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/Int-VG] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] Enable or disable DRAM timing.
4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Hyper Path 3 [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Hyper Path 3 feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Boot Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [PCI Express/PCI] [PCI/PCI Express] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Internal Graphics Mode Select [Disabled] Allows you to disable or select the internal graphics mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled, 1MB] [Enabled, 8MB] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Sets the length of the PCI Express graphics card buffer. Configuration options: [Auto] [Long] [Short] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card link latency. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Allows you to enable, disable, or set to automatic the PCI Express graphics card root control. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics link mode. Setting this item to [Auto] allows the motherboard to automatically adjust the PCI Express graphics link mode to the correct frequency based on the system configuration. Four additional settings are available for overclocking the PEG Link Mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Sets the PCI Express graphics card slot power. Configuration options: [Auto] [Light] [Normal] [Heavy] [Heavier] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] High Priority Port Select [Disabled] Disables or sets the priority port based on the ICHT PCI Express port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [PCI Express Port 5] [PCI Express Port 6] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] 2nd PCI-E slot mode [Auto] Sets the 2nd PCI Express slot mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [x2 Mode [Fast]] [x4 Mode [Faster]]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration HD Audio Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Controller [Enabled] HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the high-definition audio CODEC. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAAF) mode to legacy ACâÂÂ97 or highâÂÂdefinition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. Configuration options: [AC97] [HD Audio] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard IEEE 1394 controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Gigabit LAN controller does not support S5 Wake-On-LAN function under DOS mode or Windows î ME. Configure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset HD Audio Controller [Enabled] Front Panel Support Type [HD Audio] Onboard 1394 Controller [Enabled] Onboard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] ITE8212F Controller [Enabled] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Enable or disable High Definition Audio Controller. LAN Option ROM [Disabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller. This item appears only when the Onboard Onboard Onboard Onboard Onboard PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN PCIEX Gbe LAN items are set to Enabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Silicon 3132 Controller [SATA2 Mode] Allows you to set the onboard Silicon Image SATA RAID controller mode. Configuration options: [SATA2 Mode] [RAID Mode] [Disabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] ITE8211F Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard ITE î 8211F IDE controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Sets the time the ITE8211F IDE RAID controller detects devices connected to the IDE RAID connectors. Configuration options: [Standard Mode] [Quick Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Configuration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to [ECP]. This item allows you to set the Parallel Port ECP DMA. Configuration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Allows you to select the Game Port address or to disable the port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [200/300] [200/330] [208/300] [208/330]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS configures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system configures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Configuration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. NO: Lets the BIOS configue all the devices in the system. YES: Lets the operating system configure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system.
4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Configuration options: [Yes] [No] 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 specifications. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend.
4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Configuration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the first try. Turning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is off causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Go into On/Off or Suspend when Power button is pressed. Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI Express LAN device. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Space Bar] [Ctrl-Esc] [Power Key] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [32.5úC/90.5úF] MB Temperature [36.0úC/96.5úF] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [3813 RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Fan1 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed (RPM) [N/A] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.320V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 12V Voltage [11.880V] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] CPU Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] MB Temperature [xx.xúC/xx.xúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Disabled] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxx RPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the field shows N/A. CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efficient system operation. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode and CPU FAN PROFILE MODE CPU FAN PROFILE MODE CPU FAN PROFILE MODE CPU FAN PROFILE MODE C P U F A N P R O F I L E M O D E items appear only when the CPU Q-Fan Control is Enabled. CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] Allows you to select the type of CPU fan cable connected to the CPU fan connector. Set to [PWM] when using a 4-pin CPU fan cable. Set to [DC] when using a 3-pin CPU fan cable. Configuration options: [PWM] [DC] Some CPU fans with a 4-pin cable do not comply with Intel î âÂÂs PWM fan specification. When using this type of CPU fan, you can not reduce the CPU fan speed even if you set the CPU Q-Fan Mode to [PWM].
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Sets the chassis fan profile mode. Configuration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed (RPM) [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the power fan connector, the specific field shows N/A. VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] CPU FAN PROFILE MODE [Optimal] Sets the CPU fan profile mode. Configuration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan1 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speeds in rotations per minute (RPM). If any of the fans is not connected to the chassis, the specific field shows N/A. Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan1 Control [Disabled] Allows ysou to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the chassis fan speeds for more efficient system operation. When enabled, the chassis fan ratio is the same with the selected CPU fan ratio. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE Chassis FAN PROFILE MODE item appears only when the Chassis Q-Fan1 Control Chassis Q-Fan1 Control Chassis Q-Fan1 Control Chassis Q-Fan1 Control Chassis Q-Fan1 Control i s Enabled.
4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Configuration Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Drives Boot Settings Configuration Security 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device sequence of available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST330620A] 3rd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S360] 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 Hard Disk Drives Hard Disk Drives Hard Disk Drives Hard Disk Drives Hard Disk Drives 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] 1st ~ xxth Drive [XXXXXX] These items specify the boot device sequence of available disk drives. The number of disk drives that appear on the screen depends on the number of drives installed in the system. Configuration options: [XXXXXXX] [Disabled] Hard Disk Drives 1st Drive [XXXXXXXXX] 2nd Drive [XXXXXXXXX]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-39 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. Configuration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system.
4-40 4-40 4-40 4-40 4-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.4 4.6.4 4.6.4 4.6.4 4.6.4 Security Security Security Security Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password item, then press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Change Supervisor Change Supervisor Change Supervisor Change Supervisor Password Password Password Password Password then press <Enter>. The message âÂÂPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 4-41 After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Configuration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access No Access No Access No Access No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only View Only View Only View Only View Only allows access but does not allow change to any field. Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited allows changes only to selected fields, such as Date and Time. Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access allows viewing and changing all the fields in the Setup utility. Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password User Password User Password User Password User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]
4-42 4-42 4-42 4-42 4-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [Always] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the boot sector virus protection. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-43 4-43 Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to fields other than System Date, System Time, and Password, the BIOS asks for a confirmation before exiting. Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a confirmation appears. Select Ok Ok Ok Ok Ok to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Once you are finished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the computer is turned off. When you select this option, a confirmation window appears. Select Ok Ok Ok Ok O k to save the changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. 4.7 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items.
4-44 4-44 4-44 4-44 4-44 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a confirmation window appears. Select Ok Ok Ok Ok O k to load default values. Select Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit & Save Changes & Save Changes & Save Changes & Save Changes & Save Changes o r make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary 5 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-9 5.5 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-17 5.6 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-39
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î 2000/2003 Server/XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers D r i v e r s menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary. Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only. Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack1 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website(www.asus.com) for updates. Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to display support display support display support display support display support CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard information information information information information Click to view and Click to view and Click to view and Click to view and Click to view and install additional install additional install additional install additional install additional drivers drivers drivers drivers drivers
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update Installs the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 component update for the USB 1.1/2.0 drivers. Install this update before you install the Intel î Chipset Inf Update Program. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program This item installs the Intel î Chipset INF Update Program. This driver enables Plug-n-Play INF support for the Intel î chipset components on the motherboard. When installed to the target system, this driver provides the method for configuring the chipset components. You can install this utility using three different modes: interactive, silent, or unattended preload. Installing the driver in interactive mode requires user input during installation. User input is not required when installing the driver in silent or unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme file that came with the utility for details. Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk Allows you to create an ICH7R RAID driver disk for a 32/64-bit system. Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Installs the Realtek î ALC882M audio driver and application. See page 5-12 for details.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Allows you to create an ITE8211 IDE driver disk for a 32/64-bit system. Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Allows you to create a Silicon Image î RAID/Serial ATA driver disk for a 32-bit system. Click to display more items. Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 64-bit SATA Driver Disk Allows you to create a Silicon Image î RAID/Serial ATA driver disk for a 64-bit system. USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver. Click to go back to the previous screen.
5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. ASUS PC Probe II ASUS PC Probe II ASUS PC Probe II ASUS PC Probe II ASUS PC Probe II This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update Allows you to download the latest version of the BIOS from the ASUS website. Before using the ASUS Update, make sure that you have an Internet connection so you can connect to the ASUS website. ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver Bring life to your computer screen by installing the ASUS screen saver. ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader Installs the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader that allows you to open, view, and print documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Installs the Microsoft î DirectX 9.0c driver.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster AI Booster Installs the ASUS AI Booster software. Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application Anti-virus application The anti-virus application detects and protects your computer from viruses that destroys data. 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu The Manuals menu contains a list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. Most user manual files are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader from the Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu before opening a user manual file.
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information Click the Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also find this information on the inside front cover of this user guide. 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 Other information Other information Other information Other information Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the specified information. Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Displays the general specifications of the motherboard.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Displays the support CD contents in graphical format. Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Displays the ASUS Technical Support Request Form that you have to fill out when requesting technical support.
5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD and a brief description of each in text format.
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme file that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On Self-Tests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section âÂÂ5.2.3 Utilities menuâ for details. To launch the ASUS MyLogo2â¢: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility. Refer to section âÂÂ4.1.5 ASUS Update utilityâ for details. 2. Select Options Options Options Options Options from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS , then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS file, then click Next Next Next Next N e x t. The ASUS MyLogo2 window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo2â¢, use the Award BIOS Flash utility to make a copy of your original BIOS file, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section âÂÂ4.1.2 Updating the BIOSâÂÂ. ⢠Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo i s set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See section âÂÂ4.6.3 Boot Settings ConfigurationâÂÂ. ⢠You can create your own boot logo image in GIF, JPG, or BMP file formats.
5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility, flash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After flashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST. 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 3. Click the Run Run Run Run R u n button to perform a cable test. 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 The Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester⢠(VCT) is a cable diagnostic utility that reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology. The VCT detects and reports open and shorted cables, impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems, and pair skew problems of up to 100 meters at one meter accuracy. The VCT feature reduces networking and support costs through a highly manageable and controlled network system. This utility can be incorporated in the network systems sofware for ideal field support as well as development diagnostics. Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠To use the the Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester⢠utility: 1. Launch the VCT utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester . 2. Click Virtual Cable Virtual Cable Virtual Cable Virtual Cable Virtual Cable Tester Tester Tester Tester Tester from the menu to display the screen below. ⢠The VCT only runs on systems with Windows î XP or Windows î 2000 operating systems. ⢠The Run Run Run Run R u n button on the Virtual Cable Tester⢠main window is disabled if no problem is detected on the LAN cable(s) connected to the LAN port(s). ⢠If you want the system to check the LAN cable before entering the OS, enable the POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable item in the BIOS. See section âÂÂ4.4.2 LAN Cable Statusâ for details.
5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations The Realtek î ALC882M audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software provides Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF Out support, and interrupt capability. The ALC882M also includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for all audio ports, eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Enjoy true home theatre experience with the following advanced sound technologies: Dolby Prologic IIx, Dolby Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker, and Dolby Digital Live. Follow the installation wizard to install the Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek î î î î î Audio Driver Audio Driver Audio Driver Audio Driver Audio Driver from the support CD that came with the motherboard package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will find the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the taskbar. From the taskbar, double-click on the SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect icon to display the Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager . Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Control Control Control Control Control settings settings settings settings settings window window window window window Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration options options options options options Information Information Information Information Information button button button button button Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Realtek HD Audio Manager Tool button Tool button Tool button Tool button Tool button Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby î î î î î feature feature feature feature feature launch buttons launch buttons launch buttons launch buttons launch buttons Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit button button button button button Minimize Minimize Minimize Minimize Minimize button button button button button
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 Information Information Information Information Information Click the information button ( ) to display information about the audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller, audio codec, and language setting. Tools Tools Tools Tools Tools Click the tool button ( ) to display tools for supported Dolby î applications. Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby Dolby î î î î î Feature Launch buttons Feature Launch buttons Feature Launch buttons Feature Launch buttons Feature Launch buttons Click the button of the feature you want to launch. Minimize Minimize Minimize Minimize Minimize Click the minimize button ( ) to minimize the window display. Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit Click the exit button ( ) to exit the Realtek HD Audio Manager. Configuration options Configuration options Configuration options Configuration options Configuration options Click any of the tabs in this area to configure your audio settings. Click the arrow button ( ) to display more options.
5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Sound Effect The Realtek î ALC882D Audio CODEC allows you to set your listening environment, adjust the equalizer, set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. To set the sound effect options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Sound Sound Sound Sound Sound Effect Effect Effect Effect Effect tab. 2. Click the shortcut buttons or the drop-down menus for options on changing the acoustic environment, adjust the equalizer, or set the karaoke to your desired settings. 3. Click to effect the Sound Effect settings and exit. Mixer The Mixer option allows you to configure audio output (playback) volume and audio input (record) volume. To set the mixer options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Mixer Mixer Mixer Mixer Mixer tab. 2. Turn the volume buttons to adjust the Playback and/or Record volume. The Mixer option activates voice input from all channels by default. Make sure to set all channels to mute ( ) if you do not want voice input. 3. Make adjustments to Wave, SW Synth, Front, Rear, Subwoofer, CD volume, Mic volume, Line Volume, and Stereo mix by clicking the control tabs and dragging them up and down until you get the desired levels. 4. Click to effect the Mixer settings and exit.
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 Bass Management setting Click this tab to manage your bass settings. To set the bass management options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Bass Bass Bass Bass Bass Management setting Management setting Management setting Management setting Management setting tab. 2. Click <M> to display the distance in meters, or <FT> to display the distance in feet. 3. Adjust the values to your desired settings by entering a numeric value in the boxes, or clicking the up/down arrow. 4. Click to test your settings. 5. Click to effect the Bass Management settings and exit. Audio I/O The Audio I/O option allows you configure your input/output settings. To set the Audio I/O options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Audio I/O Audio I/O Audio I/O Audio I/O Audio I/O tab. 2. Click the drop-down menu to select the channel configuration. 3. The control settings window displays the status of connected devices. Click for analog and digital options. 4. Click <OK> to effect the Audio I/O settings and exit
5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Microphone The Microphone option allows you configure your input/output settings and to check if your audio devices are connected properly. To set the Microphone options: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the Microphone Microphone Microphone Microphone Microphone tab. 2. Click the Noise Suppression option button to reduce the static background noise when recording. 3. Click the Acoustic Echo Cancellation option button to reduce the echo from the front speakers when recording. 4. Click to effect the Microphone settings and exit. 3D Audio Demo The 3D Audio Demo option gives you a demonstration of the 3D audio feature. To start the 3D Audio Demo: 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager, click the 3D Audio 3D Audio 3D Audio 3D Audio 3D Audio Demo Demo Demo Demo Demo tab. 2. Click the option buttons to change the sound, moving path, or environment settings. 3. Click to test your settings. 4. Click to effect the 3D Audio Demo settings and exit.
ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe ASUS P5ND2-SLI Deluxe 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5.5 RAID configurations The motherboard comes with the Silicon Image Sil3132 and the Intel î ICH7R Southbridge RAID controllers that allow you to configure IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID configurations. RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 i s data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 configuration you get all the benefits of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 configurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 configuration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity. The RAID 5 configuration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 i s a striped configuration with RAID 1 segments whose segments are RAID 1 arrays. This configuration has the same fault tolerance as RAID 1, and has the same overhead for fault-tolerance as mirroring alone. RAID 10 achieves high input/output rates by striping RAID 1 segments. In some instances, a RAID 10 configuration can sustain multiple simultaneous drive failure. A minimum of four hard disk drives is required for this setup. JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet configured as a RAID set. This configuration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance benefits.
5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks The motherboard supports Ultra DMA /133/100/66 and Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks To install IDE hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Set the jumpers of each hard disk as Master/Master or Slave/Slave. 2. Install the hard disks into the drive bays. 3. Connect the HDD signal cables. 4. Connect a 4-pin power cable to the power connector on each drive. Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy first the RAID driver from the support CD to a floppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ5.6 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. Refer to the RAID controllers user manual on the support CD for detailed information on RAID configurations. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage Matrix Storage . The Intel î Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH7R chip allows you to create a RAID 0 and a RAID 1 set using only two identical hard disk drives. The Intel î Matrix Storage technology creates two partitions on each hard disk drive to create a virtual RAID 0 and RAID 1 sets. This technology also allows you to change the hard disk drive partition size without losing any data.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations This motherboard supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), RAID 5, and Intel î Matrix Storage configurations for Serial ATA hard disks drives through the Intel î ICH7R SouthBridge chip. Setting the RAID item in BIOS Setting the RAID item in BIOS Setting the RAID item in BIOS Setting the RAID item in BIOS Setting the RAID item in BIOS You must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set(s). To do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST. 2. Go to the Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu Main Menu , select IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration , then press <Enter>. 3. Select the item Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As , then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 4. Select RAID RAID RAID RAID RAID from the Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As Configure SATA As item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Select the item Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM Onboard Serial-ATA BOOTROM , press <Enter>, then select Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled from the options. 6. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup.
5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10 (RAID 0 1), and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial ATA hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial ATA connectors supported by the Southbridge. To enter the Intel î Application Accelerator RAID Option ROM utility: 1. Install all the Serial ATA hard disk drives. 2. Turn on the system. 3. During POST, press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None defined. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) To create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0(Stripe) RAID 0(Stripe) RAID 0(Stripe) RAID 0(Stripe) RAID 0(Stripe) , then press <Enter>. 4. When the Disks Disks Disks Disks Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to configure as RAID. This pop-up screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection.
5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 8. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (mirrored) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1(Mirror) RAID 1(Mirror) RAID 1(Mirror) RAID 1(Mirror) RAID 1(Mirror) , then press <Enter>. 4. When the Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity item is highlighted, key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 5. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A XX.X GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to main menu or <N> to go back to Create Volume menu.
5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) Creating a RAID 10 set (RAID 0 1) To create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume10 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB XXX.X GB Create Volume 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10(RAID0 1) RAID 10(RAID0 1) RAID 10(RAID0 1) RAID 10(RAID0 1) RAID 10(RAID0 1) , then press <Enter>. 4. When the Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 10 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 5. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want then press <Enter> when the Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (parity) To create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume 1. Create RAID Volume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length that can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume5 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 64KB 0.0 GB Create Volume WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 7. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu. [ âÂÂâ ]-Change [TAB]-Next [ESC]-Previous Menu [Enter]-Select 6. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 5 set, then press <Enter>. 3. When the RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level RAID Level item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5(Parity) RAID 5(Parity) RAID 5(Parity) RAID 5(Parity) RAID 5(Parity) , then press <Enter>.
5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 4. The Disks item is highlighted, press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives to configure as RAID. The following pop-up screen appears. [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the drive you want to set, then press <Space> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. 6. When the Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size Stripe Size item is highlighted, press the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 5 array, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4KB to 128KB. The default stripe size is 64 KB. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. 7. Key in the RAID volume capacity that you want, then press <Enter> when the Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity item is highlighted. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity. 8. Press <Enter> when the Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume Create Volume item is highlighted. This warning message appears. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu or <N> to go back to the Create Volume menu.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 Deleting a RAID set Deleting a RAID set Deleting a RAID set Deleting a RAID set Deleting a RAID set Take caution when deleting a RAID set. You will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set. To delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM v5.0.0.1032 ICH7R wRAID5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete Volume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! Are you sure you want to delete volume âÂÂVolumeXâÂÂ? (Y/N): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ]
5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Exiting the Intel Exiting the Intel Exiting the Intel Exiting the Intel Exiting the Intel î î î î î Matrix Storage Manager utility Matrix Storage Manager utility Matrix Storage Manager utility Matrix Storage Manager utility Matrix Storage Manager utility To exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit 4. Exit , then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Resetting Disks to Non-RAID Take caution before you reset a RAID volume HDD to non-RAID. Resetting a RAID volume HDD deletes all internal RAID structure on the drive. To reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A confirmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. [ RESET RAID DATA ] Resetting RAID data will remove internal RAID structures from the selected RAID disks. By removing these structures, the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5.5.3 5.5.3 5.5.3 5.5.3 5.5.3 Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations Silicon Image RAID configurations The Silicon Image RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, JBOD, and RAID 5 configurations. Use the Silicon Image RAID utility to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration menu item in the BIOS set the Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller Silicon Image Controller item to RAID Mode. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. 3. Save your changes and Exit Setup. Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launching the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager Launch the Silicon Image RAID 5 Manager from Windows î XP by clicking the Start Start Start Start Start button and selecting All Programs > Silicon Image > All Programs > Silicon Image > All Programs > Silicon Image > All Programs > Silicon Image > All Programs > Silicon Image > RAID5SATA RAID5SATA RAID5SATA RAID5SATA RAID5SATA ⢠For details on the Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID configuration, refer to the âÂÂSil3132 UserâÂÂs Manualâ in your motherboard support CD. ⢠Use a Serial ATA port multiplier if you want to configure a RAID 5, RAID 10 or CONCATENATION set. ⢠Use an external SATA box to configure a RAID 0 or RAID 1 set. ⢠The Serial ATA port multiplier and external SATA box are purchased separately. ⢠Make sure to install the Silicon Image SATA Link Sil 3132 driver and the Silicon Image RAID 5 Array Management Utility from the support CD before using RAID 5 configuration. Do not unplug the external Serial ATA external box when a RAID 0 or RAID 1 was configured.
5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility Entering the Silicon Image BIOS RAID Configuration Utility To enter the Silicon Image BIOS RAID configuration utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. During POST, press <Ctrl S> or <F4>. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only, and may not exactly match the items on your screen. The Main Menu on the upper left corner allows you to select an operation to be performed. The Main Menu options include the following: Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set - creates a new legacy RAID set or allocates spare drives. Delete RAID set Delete RAID set Delete RAID set Delete RAID set Delete RAID set - deletes a RAID set or deallocates a spare drive. Rebuild RAID1 set Rebuild RAID1 set Rebuild RAID1 set Rebuild RAID1 set Rebuild RAID1 set - rebuilds a RAID 1 set (e.g. swapped drives). Resolve Conflicts Resolve Conflicts Resolve Conflicts Resolve Conflicts Resolve Conflicts - automatically restores disrupted drives on a RAID set. Low Level Format Low Level Format Low Level Format Low Level Format Low Level Format - creates a pattern of reference marks on a drive. Formatting the disks erases all data previously stored in the drive. Logical Drive Info Logical Drive Info Logical Drive Info Logical Drive Info Logical Drive Info - shows the current configuration of each RAID set. On the upper right corner of the screen is the Help message box. The message describes the function of each menu item. At the bottom of the screen is the legend box. The keys on the legend box allow you to navigate through the setup menu options. The following lists the keys found in the legend box and their corresponding functions. â , , , , , â : Select/Move to the next item ESC ESC ESC ESC E S C : Previous Menu Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter : Select Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E Ctrl-E : Exit Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID Configuration Utility - Silicon Image Inc. Copyright (C) 2004 âÂÂâ :Select Menu ESC:Previous Menu Enter:Select Ctrl-E:Exit MAIN MENU PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB STXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB LOGICAL DRIVE HELP Press âÂÂEnterâ to create RAID set
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual configuration configuration configuration configuration configuration a n d press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) Creating a RAID 0 set (Striped) To create a RAID set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter> to display an option menu. 2. Select RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 then press <Enter> to display the following. 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration the press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. c. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration By default, Auto configuration sets the stripe size to 64K and sets the logical drives based on the physical drives installed. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION
5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 2. Select RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration c. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. d. Repeat step c to set the second, third, and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. e. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. f. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirrored) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB c. Repeat step b to select the target drive . d. After selecting the source and target drives, the following pop-up menu appears. Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual configuration configuration configuration configuration configuration and press <Enter>. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drives menu. b. Using the up or down arrow keys, select the source drive and press <Enter>. 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. c. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. ⢠Auto-configuration creates a RAID 1 set without a backup copy of the current source disk data. ⢠When migrating a single hard disk drive to a RAID 1 set, use of the Manual configuration is recommended. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Create with data copy Create without data copy ⢠The Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy option allows you to copy the current data from the source drive to the mirror drive. ⢠Select Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy i f you have important data in your source drive. ⢠The Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy option disables the disk copy function of the Mirrored set. ⢠If you selected Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy , the RAID 1 set must be repartitioned and reformatted to guarantee the consistency of its contents.
5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support e. If you selected Create with data Create with data Create with data Create with data Create with data copy copy copy copy c o p y, the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration online copy offline copy The online copy online copy online copy online copy online copy option automatically copies the data to the target drives on the background while writing to the source drives. The offline offline offline offline offline copy copy copy copy copy option allows you to copy the contents of the source drive to the target drives now. f. Use the up or down arrow keys to select desired copy method, then press <Enter>. g. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. h. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. A copy progress appears if you previously selected offline copy. 2. Select RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 RAID 5 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) To create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. c. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual configuration configuration configuration configuration configuration a n d press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB c. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. d. Repeat step c to set the second, third and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. e. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. f. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu.
5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 3. Select your desired method of configuration. Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration Auto configuration a. Select Auto Configuration then press <Enter>. b. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. c. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. Auto-configuration creates a RAID 10 set without a backup copy of the current source disk data. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration chunk size 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration Manual configuration a. Select Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual configuration configuration configuration configuration configuration a n d press <Enter>. The following pop-up menu appears. b. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a chunk size appropriate to your drive usage then press <Enter>. 2. Select RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 10 then press <Enter> to display the following. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) Creating a RAID 10 set (Mirrored Striped) To create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: TIP: W e recommend a lower stripe size for server systems, and a higher stripe size for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 The online copy online copy online copy online copy online copy option automatically copies the data to the target drives on the background while writing to the source drives. The offline offline offline offline offline copy copy copy copy copy option allows you to copy the contents of the source drive to the target drives now. PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB c. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set the first drive of the RAID set. d. Repeat step c to set the second, third, and fourth drive. The number of available drives depend on the installed and enabled physical drives in the system. ⢠The Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy option allows you to copy the current data from the source drive to the mirror drive. The Create Create Create Create Create without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy without data copy option disables the disk copy function of the Mirrored set. ⢠If you selected Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy Create without data copy , the RAID 1 set must be repartitioned and reformatted to guarantee the consistency of its contents. ⢠Select Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy Create with data copy i f you have important data in your source drive. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration Create with data copy Create without data copy e. After setting the RAID drives, the following pop-up menu appears. f. If you selected Create with data Create with data Create with data Create with data Create with data copy copy copy copy c o p y, the following pop-up menu appears. MAIN MENU Auto configuration Manual configuration online copy offline copy
5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support g. Use the up or down arrow keys to select desired copy method, then press <Enter>. h. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. i. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu. A copy progress appears if you previously selected offline copy. ⢠You can also create a RAID set using the SATARAID5 GUI utility under a Windows î environment. ⢠For details on the Silicon Image SATARaid⢠RAID 5 configuration, refer to the âÂÂSil3132 UserâÂÂs Manualâ found in your motherboard support CD. Configure a CONCATENATION set when using a single Serial ATA drive; otherwise, the system will not recognize the drive. Creating a CONCATENATION set Creating a CONCATENATION set Creating a CONCATENATION set Creating a CONCATENATION set Creating a CONCATENATION set To create a CONCATENATION set: 1. From the Silicon Image configuration utility main menu, select Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set Create RAID set then press <Enter>. 2. From the sub-menu Select CONCATENATION CONCATENATION CONCATENATION CONCATENATION CONCATENATION then press <Enter>. MAIN MENU Create RAID set Delete RAID set Rebuild Raid1 set Resolve Conflicts Low Level Format Logical Drive Info RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE RAID0 RAID1 RAID5 RAID10 SPARE DRIVE CONCATENATION PHYSICAL DRIVE 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXMB 3. The selection bar moves to the Physical Drive menu. Using the up or down arrow keys, select a drive then press <Enter> to set a drive for the RAID set. 4. The utility prompts a message to input the RAID size, use the up or down arrow keys to set the RAID size then press <Enter>. 5. Press <Y> to confirm or <N> to return to the Main Menu.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe 5-39 5-39 5-39 5-39 5-39 5.6 Creating a RAID driver disk A floppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. You can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD) or in Windows î environment. To create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart your computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the first boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. Restart your computer. 5. Press any key when prompted to boot from CD. The Makedisk menu appears. 6. Place a blank, high-density floppy disk to the floppy disk drive, then press <7>. The following message displays on screen. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 1) Make ICH7 RAID/AHCI 32bits Driver Disk 2) Make ICH7 RAID/AHCI 64bits Driver Disk 3) Make ITE8211 32bits Driver Disk 4) Make ITE8211 64bits Driver Disk 5) Make Sil3132 RAID 32bits Driver Disk 6) Make Sil3132 SATA 32bits Driver Disk 7) Format floppy disk 8) FreeDOS command prompt Please choose 1 ~ 8 7. Press <Enter> to format the floppy disk. 8. When finished, select the type of RAID driver disk you want to create by typing the number preceding the option, then press <Enter>. For example, if you want to create an ICH7R SATA RAID driver disk, press <1>. The following message appears on screen. Insert new diskette for drive B:\ and press ENTER when ready... Please insert your formatted floppy to drive B:\ Press a key to continue.
5-40 5-40 5-40 5-40 5-40 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 3. Insert floppy disk to floppy disk drive. 4. Follow succeeding screen information to complete process. 5. Write-protect the floppy disk to avoid computer virus infection. To install the RAID driver: 1. During the OS installation, the system prompts you to press the F6 key to install third-party SCSI or RAID driver. 2. Press <F6> then insert the floppy disk with RAID driver into the floppy disk drive. 3. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation. Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.2 Drivers menuâ for details. 9. The RAID drivers are copied to the floppy disk. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the floppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. 10. Press any key to return to the Makedisk menu. To create a RAID driver disk: 1. Place the motherboard support CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. When the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears, select the RAID driver disk you want to create: ⢠Click Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk Make ITE8211 32/64 bit IDE Driver Disk t o create a 32-bit or 64-bit ITE î 8211F driver disk. ⢠Click Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk Make ICH7 32 bit RAID Driver Disk o r Make ICH7 Make ICH7 Make ICH7 Make ICH7 Make ICH7 64 bit RAID Driver Disk 64 bit RAID Driver Disk 64 bit RAID Driver Disk 64 bit RAID Driver Disk 64 bit RAID Driver Disk t o create a 32-bit or 64-bit Silicon Image RAID driver disk. ⢠Click Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk Make Silicon Image 32bit RAID Driver Disk o r Make Make Make Make Make Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk Silicon Image 32bit SATA Driver Disk t o create a Silicon Image RAID driver disk. Or Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility. ⢠Go to \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk \Drivers\ITE8211\Makedisk for the Silicon Image RAID driver disk utility. ⢠Go to \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk \Drivers\Chipset\Intel\Makedisk for the Intel î ICH7R RAID driver disk utility. ⢠Go to \Drivers\Sil3132 \Drivers\Sil3132 \Drivers\Sil3132 \Drivers\Sil3132 \Drivers\Sil3132 for the Silicon Image RAID driver disk utility.
A CPU features The Appendix describes the CPU features that the motherboard supports.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe Chapter summary A A.1 Intel î EM64T ........................................................................ A-1 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) .................... A-1 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ...................................... A-3
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe A.1 Intel î EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î Pentium î D or Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS file that supports EM64T. You can download the latest BIOS file from the ASUS website (www.asus.com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS file. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Visit www.microsoft.com for more information on Windows î 64-bit OS. Using the Intel Using the Intel Using the Intel Using the Intel Using the Intel î î î î î EM64T feature EM64T feature EM64T feature EM64T feature EM64T feature To use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T. 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition or Windows î Server 2003 x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support CD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any. Refer to the expansion card or add-on device(s) documentation, or visit the related website, to verify if the card/device supports a 64-bit system. A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS file that supports EIST. You can download the latest BIOS file from the ASUS website (www.asus.com/support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www.intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A.2.1 A.2.1 A.2.1 A.2.1 A.2.1 System requirements System requirements System requirements System requirements System requirements Before using EIST, check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠Intel î Pentium î 4 processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS file with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î XP SP2/Windows î Server 2003 SP1/Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions)
A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features A.2.2 A.2.2 A.2.2 A.2.2 A.2.2 Using the EIST Using the EIST Using the EIST Using the EIST Using the EIST To use the EIST feature: 1. Turn on the computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 2. Go to the Advanced Menu Advanced Menu Advanced Menu Advanced Menu Advanced Menu , highlight CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration , then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology Intel(R) SpeedStep Technology item to [Automatic], then press <Enter>. See page 4-26 for details. 4. Press <F10> to save your changes and exit the BIOS setup. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Properties Properties Properties Properties Properties from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties window appears, click the Screen Saver Screen Saver Screen Saver Screen Saver Screen Saver tab. 7. Click the Power Power Power Power Power button on the Monitor power section to open the Power Options Power Options Power Options Power Options Power Options Properties Properties Properties Properties Properties window. 8. On the Power schemes Power schemes Power schemes Power schemes Power schemes section, click , then select any option except Home/Office Desktop Home/Office Desktop Home/Office Desktop Home/Office Desktop Home/Office Desktop or Always On Always On Always On Always On Always On . 9. Click Apply Apply Apply Apply Apply , then click OK OK OK OK OK . 10. Close the Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties Display Properties window. After you adjust the power scheme, the CPU internal frequency slightly decreases when the CPU loading is low. The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe ASUS P5LD2 Deluxe A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hyper-Threading Technology is supported under Windows î XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www.intel.com/info/hyperthreading. Using the Hyper-Threading Technology Using the Hyper-Threading Technology Using the Hyper-Threading Technology Using the Hyper-Threading Technology Using the Hyper-Threading Technology To use the Hyper-Threading Technology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Menu Menu Menu Menu M e n u, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology i s set to Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled . See page 4-26 for details. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. 3. Restart the computer.
A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features Appendix: CPU features